CARL R. DARNELL ARMY MEDICAL CENTER STARBUCKS Hood... · CARL R. DARNELL ARMY MEDICAL CENTER STARBUCKS FORT HOOD, TEXAS SPECIFICATIONS March 11, 2016 2821 West 7th Street, Suite 400

CARL R. DARNELL ARMY MEDICAL CENTER

STARBUCKS

FORT HOOD, TEXAS

SPECIFICATIONS March 11, 2016

2821 West 7th Street, Suite 400 Fort Worth, TX 76107 Office 817-877-5571 Fax 817-877-4245

Multatech Project No. 015014.00

15014.01 Carl R. Darnall Army Medical Center - Starbucks 3/11/2016Fort Hood, Texas

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTINGREQUIREMENTS

00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK01 10 17 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT01 10 18 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

(AF/CI)01 10 60 SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES01 10 61 SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN01 10 62 SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN01 31 13 PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION01 30 10 SUBMITTALS AND RFI'S01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES01 78 10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS01 78 20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE08 80 00 GLAZING08 91 00 LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING09 30 00 TILING09 51 00 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2

09 60 00 TERRAZZO REPAIR09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING/BASE09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING09 97 10 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 SIGNAGE10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING22 10 06 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, ANDAIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION23 09 13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 34 CONDUIT26 05 37 BOXES26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES26 24 16 PANELBOARDS26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING


00 01 07 - 1SEALS PAGE

SEALS PAGEARCHITECTURE

ELECTRICAL

MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING

END OF SECTION


00 01 07 - 2SEALS PAGE


01 10 00 - 1SUMMARY OF WORK

SUMMARY OF WORKPART 1 GENERAL1.01 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all supervision, labor,equipment and materials required to construct a new Express convenience store and BarberShop within the newly operational Carl R. Darnall Army Medical Center, in accordance withthese specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of thecontract.

B. Location: The work to be performed is located in the new Carl R. Darnall Army Medical Centerlocated on Santa Fe Avenue in Fort Hood, Texas.1. Access to be provided at Marvin Leath Visitor Center on T.J. Mills Blvd off from U.S. Route

190.C. Principal Features:

1. Demolition:a. Erection of construction barricades.b. Removal of door and hardware.c. Removal of wall partition.d. Removal of electric strike and access pad.e. Removal of storefront framing, glazing, door and hardware.

2. Construction new facility for:a. Starbucks:

1) Cafe area.2) Workroom.3) Backbar area.4) Dry storage.5) Remote storage room next to Express/Barber Shop

3. Construction of all related Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical work commensurate with theProject Scope:a. Sprinkler system.b. Fire alarm and mass notification systems.c. Plumbing, heating ventilating and air conditioning.d. Security/communication rough-ins, data and sound system.e. Preview boards, menu boards and speaker posts.

D. General Provisions1. A copy of the General Provisions of the Contract is included in the Solicitation Package.2. Bidders/Contractors are advised to take note of the following:

a. Cleaning up.b. Material and Workmanship.c. Accident Prevention.d. Existing structures on and surrounding site.e. Utilities and improvements.f. Operation and storage areas.g. Site investigationh. Permits.i. Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.

1.02 SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. General working hours on Post are from 0700 to 01600 hours. B. No streets will be blocked without Post DPW approval.C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked on to streets resulting from this

construction operation.



D. Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be keptclean and neat.

E. No burning is permitted on the Installation.1.03 UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

A. Contractor will be required to coordinate with the Health Facility Planning Agency (HFPA) tolocate connection points to existing utilies. (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

1.04 LAYING OUT WORKA. Layout:

1. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified byContractor.

2. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to theContracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed.

3. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry outwork in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the constructioncontemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check allArchitectural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in anyway affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.1. Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or

designated representative for verifications and adjustment.2. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part to

comply with this function shall be done at his expense.D. Field Dimensions:

1. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design andarrangement of all apparatus, fixtures and accessories necessary to complete the workrequired.

2. Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changesnecessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost toAAFES.

3. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, andContractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory andworkmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.05 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERFLOOR WORKA. Carefully check the site where project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires and

equipment.1. Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or not shown

or specified.B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underfloor improvements that are shown

on the drawings.1. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such

improvements shown on the drawings and not scheduled for demolition.1.06 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.B. When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under this

Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.1. Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service.2. Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner.3. Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the

Contracting Officer and Ft. Hood DPW and HFPA.



C. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify theContracting Officer, Ft. Hood DPW, HFPA and utility owner in writing at least ten (10) businessdays in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.1. Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum.2. Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from the

existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by theContractor.a. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum

requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends or holidays.b. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility

services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer, Ft. Hood DPW,HFPA and utility owner.

1.07 WELDING PERMITA. Prior to commencing any welding, Contractor shall obtain a welding permit through Ft. Hood

DPW offices from the Ft. Hood Fire Department.1.08 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for UniformTraffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points ofexcavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

1.09 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICESA. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding

equipment, electric arc welding, sweat soldering, etc., are employed for job accomplishment,the following procedures are mandatory:1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not

present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of anycompound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present.3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal.4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets, wetting of

surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backingand portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Post Fire Department 24 hours aheadof usage and obtain a permit.a. POC: Robert L. Perkinsb. E-mail: [email protected]. Phone: (254) 288-5820.

1.10 FIRE PROTECTIONA. Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire

damage.B. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and

shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing

flammable materials and paints.1. No storage will be permitted within the building.

D. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containersand removed from the building during unused periods.

E. Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPANos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be availablefor each area of work and temporary building.



F. Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army FireRegulations and Installation Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on this Post.

G. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is beingperformed.1. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of

incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hotmetal.

2. When temporary heating devices are used they shall be monitored when operating whenother workmen are not on the premises.

1.11 WORK BY OTHERSA. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as

a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.).2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or Concessionaires.3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.

1.12 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENTA. See Specification Section 01 10 17, AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment (AF/AI).

1.13 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENTA. See Specification Section 01 10 18, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment (AF/CI).

1.14 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALSA. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor,

wall, and ceiling materials that:1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible.2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed

wherever possible including:a. Grills and registers.b. Lighting fixtures.c. Equipment.d. Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for aesthetic

purpose.3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings,

etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet with the ContractingOfficer or designated representative to determine the most satisfactory arrangement.

4. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.1.15 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall

not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacentproperty.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb ordamage the existing work more than necessary.

D. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost toAAFES, the Army or Ft. Hood.

1.16 HEADROOM UNDER PIPESA. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from

ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearancebe less than 6" above the scheduled ceiling height without written consent from the ContractingOfficer.



B. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb,horizontal or intended planes.

C. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacentwall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.17 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIESA. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks and other features and

landscaping that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other constructionwork, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by theContractor to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer, Ft. Hood DPW, HFPA and of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1.18 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPINGA. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job

conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated

representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.C. The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the

Contracting Officer's approval.D. The Contractor shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the

Contracting Officer or designated representative.1.19 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of structuresbeyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools,machinery, or any other item thereon.

B. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safestrength.

1.20 STANDARDSA. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such

as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similarstandard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendmentor supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type,class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force andeffect as though printed in these specifications.1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard,

they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent ofDocuments, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition includingamendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, andmethod of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Departmentof Commerce.

4. Where ASTM Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentativespecifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testingissued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.21 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCEA. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are

specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificatecovering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications andCommercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.



B. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designatedrepresentative for all items so specified.

1.22 REFERENCESA. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force

Exchange Service (AAFES).B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be

interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item.2. Base or Facility: Location on which Project is being constructed.3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation of the

concession.4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working drawings

and specifications.a. Multatech Architects and Engineers

2821 West 7th Street, Suite 400Fort Worth, Texas 76107817.877.5571

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service.6. Inspection Agency: Project Construction Inspector contracted by AAFES.

a. HFPA: Health Facilities Planning Agency1.23 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos,lead-based paint, PCB’s or any other know hazardous material.

B. Discovery of hazardous Site materials:1. Removal and disposal of Hazardous Materials is not included in this Contract.2. If the Contractor encounters such materials, immediately notify Ft. Hood DPW

Environmental and the Contracting Officer.3. Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by Ft. Hood DPW

Environmental and the Contracting Officer.4. Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and time

delay anticipated where such materials are encountered.1.24 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit a monthly progress report and photographs taken on or about the first ofevery month to the AAFES Contracting Officer, Project Manager and designated representativeshowing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west whereapplicable and interior.

B. Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a minimum oftwenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for Payment.

C. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project Number,location and direction taken.

D. The Contractor may also submit a digital video of the above requirements as an option tophotographs.

1.25 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS FURNISHEDA. After Contract award, and for construction purposes only, the Contractor will be provided:

1. A record set of “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications.2. A reproducible set of the “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications in

electronic format (CD/.pdf)B. Additional copies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.



PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION




01 10 17 - 1AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL1.01 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (EF/EI)

A. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.B. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficial

occupancy by AAFES usage prior to completion of entire project.C. AAFES will furnish and install equipment as indicated on the Fixture Plan in the drawings.

1. Contractor's Duties:a. Provide access for AAFES personnel.b. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that installation

can be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule.c. Provide mechanical and electrical connections to equipment and building systems

where indicated on the drawings and in the specification.d. Provide security of designated areas.e. Schedule equipment delivery dates and installation times to coordinate with the overall

schedule. Provide AAFES advance notice so equipment can be ordered on time.2. AAFES Duties:

a. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area forinstallation of property.

b. Make final mechanical and electrical connections between property and buildingsystems where indicated on the drawings and/or in the specifications.

c. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial occupancy.1.02 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 30days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished property the Contractorshall be responsible for storage and redelivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit hisrequest within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and asstated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which hecan file a claim under these conditions.

1.03 AAFES ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:A. Serving Areas & Food Preparation Areas: Schedule date of use and possession of food

preparation serving areas 30 days prior to completion of project.B. Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by AAFES shall be

sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so AAFES may occupy the areafor the use for which it is intended. Comply with Contract Clauses titled inspection ofConstruction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

1.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/EI):A. Equipment or material to be furnished and installed by AAFES is as follows and as indicated on

the Drawings:1. Check-out Fixtures and POS.2. Interior graphic signage.3. Microwaves and refrigerator.4. Office furniture.5. Storage shelving.6. Telephone system equipment.7. Security equipment.8. Walk-in coolers and freezers (electrical and mechanical service, connections, lighting and

fire protection by Contractor).


01 10 17 - 2AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

9. Food Concept equipment.1.05 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by AAFES of an area for beneficial occupancy, the ContractingOfficer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. A list of deficiencies will be provided tothe Contractor.

B. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete forbeneficial occupancy by AAFES, the area will be accepted in writing with the exception of thedeficiencies listed. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to finalacceptance at the completion of the project.

C. Damage: Damage resulting from AAFES's use will not be considered the Contractor'sresponsibility.

D. Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the AAFES "General Provisions".PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 FINAL CONNECTIONS:

A. All final electrical connections to AAFES furnished and installed equipment shall be made by theContractor as part of the construction contract. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish andinstall required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneoussupports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure AAFES-furnished equipmentin place.

B. The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel installing AAFES furnishedmaterials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.

END OF SECTION


01 10 18 - 1AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI)

AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI)PART 1 GENERAL1.01 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI):

A. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed (AF/CI) and Vendor Furnished/ContractorInstalled (VF/CI) equipment shall be handled in accordance with the "Army and Air ForceExchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "AAFES Furnished Property".

B. AAFES will furnish equipment indicated for installation by the Contractor and will provide finalequipment start-up and training.

C. Contractor shall provide:1. Coordination and confirmation of exact equipment dimensions and rough-in

requirements for all equipment furnished by AAFES.2. All rough-ins and final connections to equipment designated for installation by Contractor.3. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for intended use.4. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or designated

representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 STARBUCKS:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Food Service Equipment and Fixtures: AAFES willfurnish the equipment and fixtures indicated for installation in the Back-of-House PreparationAreas and Serving Areas for installation by the Contractor (AF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment requirements, complete installationof equipment including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items furnished byAAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these SolicitationDocuments.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Designate required delivery date for each product.1. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing at least 60 days in

advance of the date that AAFES furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed.2. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins

will be furnished by AAFES.B. The equipment, fixtures and furnishings will be received at the job site by a

representative of AAFES who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition andquantities.1. The representative will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment, fixtures

and furnishings to the Contractor.2. After receipt of equipment, fixtures and furnishings Contractor shall:

a. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install set in final position,align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of equipment.

b. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment, fixture and furnishing plans and schedules shown on the Drawings and therough-in drawings provided by AAFES.

c. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install allreinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary tosecure AAFES furnished equipment in place.

d. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. e.e. Apply finish indicated, if any.

3. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electricalhook ups, and put into good operating condition.

4. Upon completion of installation Contractor shall provide:a. Start-up and adjustments to all equipment.


01 10 18 - 2AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI)

b. Written notification to Contracting Officer or designated representative of completionand readiness for demonstration and training to appropriate personnel.

c. Establish date, time and provide written notification of training sessions to ContractingOfficer or designated representative and to manufacturer’s representative necessaryto conduct training sessions.

d. Provide written notification to appropriate personnel required in attendance at trainingsessions.

e. Maintain an attendance sheet and minutes of each training session forsubmittal at Project Closeout.

f. Provide video taping and four (4) CD copies of each training session and equipmentdemonstration for submittal at Final Closeout.

5. AAFES Duties:a. Deliver all AAFES furnished items to the job site.b. Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart.c. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions.d. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all

plumbing and electrical rough-ins.3.02 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished equipment the Contractorshall be responsible for storage and delivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit hisrequest within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and asstated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which hecan file a claim under these conditions.

END OF SECTION


01 10 60 - 1SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURESPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor required health and safety plan.1. Contractor is responsible for reading the Risk Assessment Plan and following the

directions therein.2. Contractor must maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment: That is, 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a40-hour week

B. Sample Construction Hazard Plan.C. Sample Safety Plan.

1.02 REFERENCESA. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication. – EM 385-1-1: Safety and Health Requirements

Manual (Most current version).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for EXCHANGE approval - The following items shall be submitted for EXCHANGEapproval:1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified

employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of allaccident prevention activities. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirementsare incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safetymeasures and instructions are actually being applied. This person shall be on site at alltimes that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. All otheremployees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training requirements for their jobcapacity.

B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at

the pre-construction conference. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potentialhazards that could arise during the course of the work.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the

Pre-construction conference. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whateverprovisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHAstandards.

b. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion ofconstruction and will be specific to perchloroethylene (tetrachloroethylene) (PCE), andincorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuousvapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibitionagainst the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

c. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:1) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products

addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.2) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation

requires. Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vaporbarriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor forconstruction areas identified by the installation and/or EXCHANGE as areas ofknown hazards only. These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the



responsibility of the Contractor. This requirement will be coordinated through theHealth and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4) Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:(a) Must be kept on site, and must be written.(b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for each site task and

operation (to be supplied by the installation).(c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120).(d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by employees for

each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).(e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).(f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring,

environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (theirmaintenance and calibration).

(g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to becoordinated with the installation.

(h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).(i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).(j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or

program equivalent).(k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).(l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all

employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.(m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health

Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 trainingrequirements for supervisors).

(n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and afterconsultation with the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and Installation SafetyOffice.

d. Hazard Response Plan: The unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazardsas transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressedwithin an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by all contractors. This requirement willbe coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation bythe contractor (sample provided).

e. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materialsin use.

1.04 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGSA. The Installation will schedule subsequent safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor

personnel on a monthly basis. The Owner's representative and installation will attendperiodically. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the Contracting Officerfor inclusion in the contract file.

1.05 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPINGA. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Base requirements.

Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after theincident and will be followed by a copy of an Accident Report.

1.06 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTSA. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

1.07 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas. The Contractor shall post the

area and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within thelimits of the work site.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION




01 10 61 - 1SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN

SAMPLE SAFETY PLANPART 1 GENERAL1.01 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: THE PUBLICATIONS LISTED BELOW FORM A PART OF THIS

SPECIFICATION AND ARE REFERRED TO IN THE TEXT BY THE BASIC DESIGNATION ONLY.1.02 US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS:

EM 385-1-1 U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS SAFETY AND HEALTHREQUIREMENTS MANUAL

1.03 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA):NFPA 70-1993 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC)

1.04 SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS (SAE):J 994-85 ALARM, BACKUP, ELECTRIC-PERFORMANCE, TEST, AND APPLICATION, RECOMMENDED PRACTICE

1.05 GENERAL: WORK SAFETY IS OF PARAMOUNT IMPORTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALLCOMPLY WITH THE CONTRACT CLAUSE IN THE SOLICITATION ENTITLED ACCIDENTPREVENTION, INCLUDING THE U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS SAFETY AND HEALTHREQUIREMENTS MANUAL REFERRED TO THEREIN IN ADDITION TO THE PROVISIONS OFTHIS SPECIFICATION.

1.06 SAFETY PROGRAM: THE U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS SAFETY AND HEALTHREQUIREMENTS MANUAL, EM 385-1-1, AND ALL SUBSEQUENT REVISIONS TO IN THECONTRACT CLAUSE ACCIDENT PREVENTION OF THIS CONTRACT, ARE HEREBYSUPPLEMENTED AS FOLLOWS:A. The Contractor shall designate an employee responsible for overall supervision of accident

prevention activities. Such duties shall include:1. Assuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated in work methods2. Inspecting the work to ensure that safety measure and instructions are actually applied.The proposed safety supervisor's name and qualifications shall be submitted in writing forapproval to the Contracting Officer's Representative. This individual must have prior experienceas a safety engineer or be able to demonstrate his/her familiarity and understanding of thesafety requirements over a prescribed trial period. The safety engineer shall have the authorityto act on behalf of the Contractor's general management to take whatever action is necessaryto assure compliance with safety requirements. The safety supervisor is required to be on thesite when work is being performed.

B. Prior to commencement of any work at a job site, a preconstruction safety meeting shall be heldbetween the Contractor and the Corps of Engineers Area/Resident Engineer to discuss theContractor's safety program and in particular to review the following submittals:1. Contracts Accident Prevention Plan: An acceptable accident prevention plan, written by

the prime contractor for the specific work and implementing in detail the pertinentrequirements of EM 385-1-1, shall be submitted for Government approval.

2. Activity Phase Hazard Analysis Plan: Prior to beginning each major phase of work, anactivity hazard analysis (phase plan) shall be prepared by the Contractor for that phase ofwork and submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval. A phase isdefined as an operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced inprevious operations or where a new subcontractor or work crew is to perform work. Theanalysis shall address the hazards for each activity performed in the phase and shallpresent the procedures and safeguards necessary to eliminate the hazards or reduce therisk of an acceptable level.

C. Subsequent jobsite safety meetings shall be held as follows:1. A safety meeting shall be held at least once a month for all supervisors on the project to

review past activities, to plan ahead for new or changed operations and to establish safe


01 10 61 - 2SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN

working procedures to anticipate hazards. An outline report of each monthly meeting shallbe submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative.

2. At least one safety meeting shall be conducted weekly, or whenever new crews beginwork, by the appropriate field supervisors or foreman for all workers. An outline report ofthe meeting giving date, time, attendance, subjects discussed and who conducted it shallbe maintained and copies furnished the designated authority on request.

1.07 ACCIDENTS: CHARGEABLE ACCIDENTS ARE TO BE INVESTIGATED BY BOTHCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL AND THE CONTRACTING OFFICER.

1.08 ACCIDENT REPORTING, ENG FORM 3394: SECTION I, PARAGRAPH 01.D, OF EM 385-1-1AND THE CONTRACT CLAUSE ENTITLED ACCIDENT PREVITION ARE AMENDED ASFOLLOWS: THE PRIME CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ON ENG FORM 3394, SUPPLIED BYTHE CONTRACTING OFFICER, ALL INJURIES TO HIS EMPLOYEES OR SUBCONTRACTORSTHAT RESULT IN LOST TIME AND ALL DAMAGE TO PROPERTY AND/OR EQUIPMENT INEXCESS OF $2,000 PER INCIDENT. VERBAL NOTIFICATION OF SUCH ACCIDENT SHALL BEMADE TO THE CONTRACTING OFFICER WITHIN 72 HOURS FOLLOWING SUCH ACCIDENTS. THE WRITTEN REPORT SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:A. A description of the circumstances leading up to the accident, the cause of the accident, and

corrective measures taken to prevent recurrence.B. A description of the injury and name and location of the medical facility giving examination and

treatment.C. A statement as to whether or not the employee was permitted to return to work after

examination and treatment by the doctor, and if not, an estimate or statement of the number ofdays lost from work. If there have been days lost from work, state whether or not the employeehas been re-examined and declared fit to resume work as of the date of the report.

1.09 OSHA REQUIREMENTS:A. OSHA Log: A copy of the Contractors' OSHA Log of Injuries shall be forwarded monthly to the

Contracting Officer.1. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

B. OSHA Inspections: Contractors shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer when an OSHACompliance Official (Federal or State Representative) presents his/her credentials and informsthe Contractor that the workplace will be inspected for OSHA compliance. Contractors shallalso notify the Contracting Officer upon determination that an exit interview will taken placeupon completion of an OSHA inspection. (NABSA).

1.10 SUBMITTALS FOR GOVERNMENT APPROVAL: SUBMITTALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCEWITH SECTION 01 30 00 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. ALL REQUIREDSUBMITTALS OF ITEMS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE FOR INFORMATION ONLY,EXCEPT FOR THOSE ITEMS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING WHICHSHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR GOVERNMENT APPROVAL:A. Written designation of safety representative.B. Written project specific accident prevention plan.C. Written activity phase hazard analysis plan.

END OF SAMPLE SAFETY PLAN


01 10 62 - 1SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN

SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLANTO BE ACCOMPLISHED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION AND POSTED IN ALL CONSTRUCTION TRAILERS

SHOULD AN UNPREDICTED DISCOVERY OF A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL OR CONDITION BEMADE DURING CONSTRUCTION THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE OF ACTIONS IS REQUIREDWHEN THERE IS NO IMMEDIATE THREAT TO LIFE OR PROPERTYITEM FIRST ACTION NOTIFY TELEPHONE #Transite Pipe Cease Activity 1. BCE

area of discovery 2. AAFES Contracting Officerand/or CME3. AAFES EnvironmentalEngineer when Unable toContact 1,2

Contaminated Soil Cease activity Same as above

area of discovery

cover with plastic

Buried Munitions Cease activity in Same as above area of discovery

UST Same as aboveOtherShould there be an immediate threat to life or property, the emergency response plan for theinstallation, which is to be on file at the construction side, is to be followed in every detail. Anexample of this procedure is the rupture of a fuel line, liquid or natural gas.

END OF SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN


01 10 62 - 2SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION HAZARD PLAN


01 30 10 - 1SUBMITTALS AND RFI'S

SUBMITTALS AND RFI'SPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting ShopDrawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals and Requests for Information (RFI)

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive

action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. In general, Submittals are only required if products deviate from items specified in the drawingsand specifications. It is the contractors responsibility to coordinate and verify all productssupplied for the project meet the minimum standards and quality outlined in the contractdocuments.The Architect will review a submittal upon request from the owner.

B. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be available byArchitect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.1. It will be the Contractors responsibility to verify the accuracy of the provided CAD file with

the built conditions.2. The Architect is not responsible for any building components sized and built from the

provided CAD files.C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently forcoordination.a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension ofthe Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough inadvance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor whena submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner asinitial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and ConstructionManager.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.d. Name and address of Contractor.e. Name and address of subcontractor.f. Name and address of supplier.



g. Name of manufacturer.h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimalpoint and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 10 00.01). Resubmittals shallinclude an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06 10 00.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.l. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documentson submittals.1. Provide cut sheet/sheets for original specified product highlighted to show how submitted

deviant product is equal or exceeds original.2. The contractor shall alert the submittal reviewer of any products or installation methods not

consistent with that depicted within the contract documents with the appropriate deviationsform. Such information and form related to the deviation will be included with the relatedsubmittal and relevant information highlighted for the Architect/Engineer to easily decipherand review for adequacy

G. Substitutions: The contractor shall alert the submittal reviewer of any specified productsrequiring substitution with the appropriate substitutions form. Such information and form relatedto the substitution will be included with the related submittal and relevant information highlightedfor the Architect/Engineer to easily decipher and review for adequacy.

H. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architector Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,initial submittal may serve as final submittal.1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect and Construction Manager.2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken

and will be returned.I. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, withoutreview, received from sources other than Contractor.1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Destination (To:).d. Source (From:).e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.f. Category and type of submittal.g. Submittal purpose and description.h. Specification Section number and title.i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.l. Remarks.m. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevantinformation, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect onprevious submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as relatedsubmittal.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.1. Note date and content of previous submittal.



2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent ofrevision.

3. Highlight or cloud all required revisions for resubmittal.4. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “"NO EXCEPTIONS" or “EXCEPTIONS AS

NOTED” by the reviewer.K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "NO EXCEPTIONS", or

“EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED” by reviewer.1.04 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submit project related clarification requests on an approved form format.B. Include Project name, building title and correct RFI sequence number and subject.C. RFI's shall be sent electronically via email to the appropriate party.D. RFI review time: In general, depending on the complexity of the RFI content, allow 3 days from

receipt of the RFI for the appropriate party to respond.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.Designate the discipline, log number, and specification section when referencing the submittalon the transmittal cover letter. Use the applicable single discipline/log number as identification ofeach submittal. Any unacceptable items will be so noted and the entire package returned forcorrection and resubmittal. Once these items are corrected, the entire Section shall beresubmitted for review of the unacceptable items only. Partial submittals are unacceptable.Intent of this requirement is that all bound sets of data will be identical and will contain onlyacceptable information.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction andtype of product or equipment.1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.d. Standard color charts.e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.g. Printed performance curves.h. Operational range diagrams.i. Mill reports.j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.l. Testing by recognized testing agency.m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.

Reviewer will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a ProjectRecord Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not baseShop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:



a. Dimensions.b. Identification of products.c. Fabrication and installation drawings.d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring.f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.g. Templates and patterns.h. Schedules.i. Design calculations.j. Compliance with specified standards.k. Notation of coordination requirements.l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.n. Seal and signature of professional engineer, if specified.o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are

required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies arerequired for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies;remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project RecordDrawing.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of thesecharacteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics betweensubmittal and actual component as delivered and installed.1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-controlcomparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used todetermine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time ofuse.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner'sproperty, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units orsections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer'sproduct line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, preparedfrom same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, andphysically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range ofcolor and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, thefollowing: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts orcontainers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showingcolor, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testingand inspection.



a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Reviewer will retain two Samplesets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as aProject Record Sample.1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to bedemonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in materialor product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired unitsthat show approximate limits of variations.

2.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Reviewer will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature ofentity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signedby an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience offirm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, namesand addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnelcomply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding ProcedureSpecification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include namesof firms and personnel certified.

D. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatInstaller complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, isauthorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifyingthat manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence ofmanufacturing experience where required.

F. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatproduct complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatmaterial complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency'sstandard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance withrequirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced bymanufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports onevaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, oron comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testingagency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installationof product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testingagency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performedbefore installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substratepreparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency'sstandard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either duringinstallation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance withrequirements in the Contract Documents.



M. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation andnormal maintenance of products and equipment.

N. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performanceand design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list ofassumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include loaddiagrams, if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

O. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documentsmanufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating aproduct or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number ofmanufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:1. Preparation of substrates.2. Required substrate tolerances.3. Sequence of installation or erection.4. Required installation tolerances.5. Required adjustments.6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

P. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorizedservice representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements

and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and forcompliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark withapproval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project nameand location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, dateof Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTIONA. General: Architect/Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval

stamp and will return them without action.B. Action Submittals: Architect, Engineer and Construction Manager will review each submittal,

make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect, Engineerand Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stampappropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

C. Informational Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, orwill return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal toappropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returnedwithout review.



E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may bediscarded.

END OF SECTION




01 31 13 - 1PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Request For Information (RFI’s).B. Pre-construction Meeting.C. Pre-installation Conferences.D. Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.

1.02 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIS)A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect-Engineer and AAFES Project

Manager.B. Architect-Engineer's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect-Engineer's response for

each RFI.C. RFI Log:

1. Maintain a tabular log of RFIs.2. Submit log weekly.

1.03 PROJECT WEB SITEA. Use Contractor's Project Web site for project communication and documentation.B. Contractor shall provide a minimum of ten Project Web site user licenses for use of, AAFES,

AAFES's Commissioning Authority, Contractor, Architect-Engineer, and Architect-Engineer'sconsultants.1. Contractor shall provide up to eight hours of software training to Project Web site users.2. Project Web site software package:

a. Prolog – Converge, or equal Construction Management Software.1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting. B.Attendance Required:1. Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other AAFES HQ representatives.2. Local and regional AAFES representatives.3. Architect-Engineer4. Installation representatives (Engineering, Fire Chief, Security, Environmental, etc.)5. Contractor6. Major Sub-contractors

B. Agenda:1. Execution of Notice to Proceed.2. Distribution of Contract Documents.3. Submission of list of sub-contractors.4. Review of AAFES checklist of contract requirements.5. Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values.6. Discussion of Construction Schedule.7. Discussion of critical sequencing.8. Designation of responsible personnel.9. Processing of field decisions and change orders.10. Submission of applications for payment.11. Submittal of shop drawings.12. Procedures for maintaining record documents.13. Fire, safety and spill procedures.14. Security procedures.15. Accident prevention and reports.16. Housekeeping procedures.



17. Use of premisesa. Office and storage locations.b. Personnel parking.

18. Major equipment deliveries.19. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

C. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to AAFES, Contractor, andInstallation Engineer.

1.05 PROJECT MEETINGSA. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials andinstallations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.a. Advise Architect-Engineer, and AAFES’ Commissioning Authority of scheduled

meeting dates.2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:a. Contract Documents.b. Optionsc. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Purchasesf. Deliveries.g. Submittalsh. Review of mockups.i. Possible conflicts.j. Compatibility requirements.k. Time schedules.l. Weather limitations.m. Manufacturer's written instructions.n. Warranty requirements.o. Compatibility of materials.p. Acceptability of substrates.q. Temporary facilities and controls.r. Space and access limitations.s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.t. Testing and inspecting requirements.u. Installation procedures.v. Coordination with other work.w. Required performance results.x. Protection of adjacent work.y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, includingrequired corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other partiesrequiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance

of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.6. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other

purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.END OF SECTION






01 40 00 - 1QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

QUALITY REQUIREMENTSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. References and standards.B. Submittals.C. References and standards.D. Control of installation.E. Tolerances.F. Testing and inspection agencies and services.G. Control of installation.H. Tolerances.I. Defect Assessment.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2007a.B. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or

Testing; 2007a.C. ASTM E 543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2008.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and namesof full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

B. Design Data: Submit for Multatech Architects Engineers's knowledge as contract administratorfor the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design conceptexpressed in the contract documents, or for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to MultatechArchitects Engineers and to Contractor.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test/inspection.h. Date of test/inspection.i. Results of test/inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.k. When requested by Multatech Architects Engineers, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test report submittals are for Multatech Architects Engineers's knowledge as contractadministrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given andthe design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for AAFES, HFPA andCRDAMC-FM's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by themanufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Multatech ArchitectsEngineers, in quantities specified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.



2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must beacceptable to Multatech Architects Engineers.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printedinstructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for theAAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeterconditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for applicationor installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Multatech Architects Engineers's benefit ascontract administrator or for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM.1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Multatech Architects Engineers

for information.2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Multatech Architects Engineers's benefit as contract

administrator or for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Multatech

Architects Engineers or AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM.1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not includedin the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of thestandard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicablecodes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, exceptwhere a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until

Substantial Completion.E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Multatech Architects Engineers before proceeding.F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor

those of Multatech Architects Engineers shall be altered from the Contract Documents bymention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICESA. AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM will employ services of an independent testing agency to

perform certain specified testing; payment for cost of services will be derived from allowancecontained in Multatech's contract with ROCK Engineering and Testing.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work inaccordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. No work, connected to or in the vicinity of, any existing construction currently under warranty,shall commence without prior coordination with the original contractor and installer. The originalcontractor and installer of the existing work shall be notified and approve any construction orrepairs done to or in the vicinity of said existing construction. No work shall commence withoutwritten approval of the previous contractor/installer stating the current work and/or repairs to bedone will allow the current warranty to remain valid.



B. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.D. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Multatech Architects Engineers before proceeding.E. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more preciseworkmanship.

F. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.G. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.H. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.3.02 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with ContractDocuments, request clarification from Multatech Architects Engineers before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing Agency Duties:1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Multatech Architects Engineers and

Contractor in performance of services.3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified

standards.4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.5. Promptly notify Multatech Architects Engineers and Contractor of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work or products.6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Multatech Architects Engineers.7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.8. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

C. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities.3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected.c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Multatech Architects Engineers and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time foroperations requiring testing/inspection services.



5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additionalsamples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's agency and pay for additional samples,tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by Multatech Architects Engineers.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byContractor.

3.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct

an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.END OF SECTION


01 77 00 - 1CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including, but not limited to, the following:1. Construction observation procedures.2. Warranties.3. Final cleaning.

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETIONA. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting construction observation walk through for

determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that areincomplete in request.1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the

list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents.3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similarreleases.

4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated byOwner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. AdviseOwner'spersonnel of changeover in security provisions.

7. Complete startup testing of systems.8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.B. Construction observation: Submit a written request for Construction observation walk through

for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed withConstruction observation walk through or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect/Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after Constructionobservation walk through or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list oradditional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificatewill be issued.1. Reobservation: Request reobservation when the Work identified in previous observations

as incomplete is completed or corrected.2. Results of completed observation walk through will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion.1.03 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final observation walk through for determining dateof Final Completion, complete the following:1. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion construction observation list of

items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Thecertified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwiseresolved for acceptance.



2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurancerequirements.

3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,equipment, and systems.

B. Construction observation: Submit a written request for final construction observation walkthrough for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with constructionobservation walk through or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will preparea final Certificate for Payment after construction observation or will notify Contractor ofconstruction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.1. Reobservation: Request reobservation when the Work identified in previous observations

as incomplete is completed or corrected.1.04 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space andarea affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correctionincluding, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

1.05 WARRANTIESA. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the

Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion isindicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion ofdesignated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner duringconstruction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Provide electronic copy of all warranties.D. Provide one (1) paper copy of all warranties.

1. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents ofthe Project Manual.

2. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inchpaper.

3. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Marktab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product orinstallation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephonenumber of Installer.

4. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"Project name, and name of Contractor.

5. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenancemanuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer orfabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentiallyhazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to complywith local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollutionregulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean eachsurface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting construction observation for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and otherforeign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and otherforeign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project

site.e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free

of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering ofexterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,plenums, shafts, trenches, manholes, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo

if visible soil or stains remain.j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polishmirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or thatalready show evidence of repair or restoration.1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical

nameplates.m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and other foreign substances.n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction.r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, anddefective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply withrequirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.



D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris orexcess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerousmaterials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose oflawfully.

END OF SECTION


01 78 10 - 1PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project RecordDocuments, including the following:1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Paper Copies: Submit one (1) set of marked-up Record Prints.2. Electronic copy: Submit .pdf files of all record drawings.3. CAD file: Submit CAD file of record drawings.

B. Record Specifications:1. Submit one (1) paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract

modifications.2. Submit one (1) electronic copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract

modifications.C. Record Product Data: Submit one (1) copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as RecordProduct Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of full size black-line, white prints of the Contract Drawings andShop Drawings.1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whetherindividual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-upRecord Prints.a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult

to identify or measure and record later.b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made following Architect's written orders.k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.



3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showingactual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, showcross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguishbetween changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted fromoriginal Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before the construction observation walk through forCertificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect, Engineerand Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings ofthe Contract Drawings, as follows:1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract

Drawings.2. Format: DWG, Version, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use

in recording information.a. Architect/Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings.b. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2010.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORDDRAWING" in a prominent location.1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identificationon cover sheets.

2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files thatcorrespond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheetidentification. Include identification in each CAD file.

3. Identification: As follows:a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.e. Name of Contractor.

2.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONSA. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where

applicable.



2.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATAA. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable.2.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneousrecord keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or filemiscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for ProjectRecord Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents asthey occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples inthe field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use ProjectRecord Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order andin a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access toProject Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normalworking hours.

END OF SECTION




01 78 20 - 1OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation andmaintenance manuals, including the following:1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,

systems and equipment.1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regularinteraction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before finalinspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments.2. Submit one (1) hard copy and 3 electronic copies in a searchable format.

1.04 COORDINATIONA. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate informationfurnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section foreach system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of asystem. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.6. Name and address of Architect.7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed tothe content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in ProjectManual.1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in eachvolume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically bysystem, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve onspine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold foldedoversize sheets.



a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organizedata in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for properoperation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tabto indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipmentincluded in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section numberand title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnosticsoftware diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and useas foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeledenvelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, anddrawing locations.

2.02 OPERATION MANUALSA. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.2. Operating standards.3. Operating procedures.4. Operating logs.5. Wiring diagrams.6. Control diagrams.7. Piped system diagrams.8. Precautions against improper use.9. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.



D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controlsas installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required foridentification.

2.03 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALA. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials andsources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name andarranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, andtelephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-referenceSpecification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials andrelated services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances andconditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.04 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALA. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenanceservice contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For eachproduct, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenanceservice agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentationincluding the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essentialmaintenance procedures:1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.



5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list ofrequired lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routinemaintenance and service with standard time allotment.1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and localsources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name andtelephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances andconditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating careand maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenancedata indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipmentnot part of a system.1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify eachproduct or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in atabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment orsystems.

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate therelationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequenceand flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawingsto ensure correct illustration of completed installation.1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.E. Comply with Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES for schedule for submitting

operation and maintenance documentation.END OF SECTION


05 50 00 - 1METAL FABRICATIONS

METAL FABRICATIONSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Shop fabricated steel items.B. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.C. Steel framing and supports for applications not specified in other Sections.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.C. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.D. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2007a.E. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Tensile Strength (Metric); 2007.F. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.G. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;

American Welding Society; 2012.H. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and

Errata.I. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; Society for Protective Coatings;

1999 (Ed. 2004).J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).K. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and detailswhere applicable.1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing.C. Plates: ASTM A 283.D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1.F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.



2.02 FABRICATIONA. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMSA. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For

support of metal decking; prime paint finish.B. Lintels: As required; prime paint finish.C. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint

finish.2.04 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint steel items.1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is

required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.D. Prime Painting: One coat.

2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCESA. Squareness: 1/4 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/8 inch.C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/8 inch.D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into

concrete or embedded in masonry.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.C. Field weld components as indicated on drawings.D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION




06 10 00 - 1ROUGH CARPENTRY

ROUGH CARPENTRYPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.B. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.D. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.B. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American

Wood-Protection Association; 2002. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood

Protection Association; 2012.F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,

Department of Commerce; 2010.H. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2014.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting thespecified requirements.

3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides gradingserviceotherwise indicated.

4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearancecharacteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONSA. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.



2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood; 3/4 inch thick;

flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E84.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidityand preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three timesthickness of sheathing.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.

B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings foranchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.

D. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Chalkboards and marker boards.8. Wall paneling and trim.9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.10. Wall mounted monitors.11. AV equipment.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 16 inches on center on all edges and intostuds in field of board.1. Install adjacent boards without gaps.2. Size and Location: Coordinate with AAFES IT/IM.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet

maximum.



3.06 CLEANINGA. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION




06 41 00 - 1ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORKPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Countertops.C. Cabinet hardware.D. Factory finishing.E. Interior standing and running trimF. Flush wood panelingG. Melamine cabinetsH. Closet and Utility Shelving

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2012.B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;

2009.D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.E. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005,8th Ed., Version 2.0.

F. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).

G. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; HardwoodPlywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).

H. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical ManufacturersAssociation; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

B. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality StandardsIllustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI) or the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) andfamiliar with the AWI/AWMAC QSI.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified byAWI//AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde.3. Moisture Resistant Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, MR50, made

with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.4. Straw-based Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density, made with

adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Special Exterior A-A, made with adhesive containing no

urea formaldehyde.6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.B. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with

the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subject D (EPAMethod 24)1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

a. VOC Limits: 80 g/LD. Closet and Utility Shelving:

1. Grade: Economy2. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch(19-mm) thermoset decorative panel with PVC or polyester edge

banding3. Cleats: 3/4-inch(19-mm) panel product.

E. Shop Finishing:1. Grade: Same grade as woodwork.2. Extent: All woodwork shop finished.

2.03 PANEL MATERIALSA. Softwood Faced Plywood:B. Veneer Faced Plywood Finish: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of particleboard, medium densityfiberboard, strawboard, or engineered combination of core materials listed; type of gluerecommended for specific application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows:

C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMACArchitectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressurebonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness asrequired.1. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inchthick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other componentsindicated on drawings.

E. Hardwood Edgebanding: Use solid hardwood edgebanding matching species, color, grain, andgrade for exposed portions of cabinetry.

2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:



1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.3. Wilsonart, LLC: www.wilsonart.com.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specificapplications and as follows:1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as

scheduled, finish as scheduled.2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled,

finish as scheduled.3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch nominal thickness, through color,

colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.4. Post-Formed Vertical Surfaces: VGP, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors

as scheduled, finish as scheduled.5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled,

finish as scheduled.2.05 COUNTERTOPS

A. Solid Surface Countertop: Refer drawingsB. Brackets: Work Stations

1. Basis of design: A&M Hardware, Inc.: Work Station Brackets2. Size 18" x 24" or as required.3. Color: Black4. Provide blocking in wall at each bracket.5. Spacing: 48" O.C. maximum or as shown on drawings.

a. Maximum 6" overhang at exposed ends.C. Refer elsewhere for countertop materials.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;

chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

2.07 HARDWAREA. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf

standards and coordinated shelf rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacingadjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.D. Catches: Magnetic.E. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.3. Mounting: Side mounted.4. Stops: Integral type.5. Products:

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.

F. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) self-closing type, steel with polished finish.



1. Products:a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com.c. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.

2.08 FABRICATIONA. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.C. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints.D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.E. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than

one piece for any single length.F. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.G. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightlybevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.1. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.

2.09 FACTORY FINISHINGA. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species

to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION


07 84 00 - 1FIRESTOPPING

FIRESTOPPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistantassemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.B. FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation;

2013.C. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,

and firestopping test or design number.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.D. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated.1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at

www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation under FM 4991, or meeting any two ofthe following requirements:.

2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction (if applicable).

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days afterinstallation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required fortested assembly design.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING FOR FLOOR-TO-FLOOR, WALL-TO-FLOOR, AND WALL-TO-WALL JOINTSA. Gypsum Board Walls:

1. Wall to Wall Joints:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.

2. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Steel Beam and Concrete Over Metal Deck Floor withSprayed On Fireproofing:



a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0259; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Sprayand CP 672.

3. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Flat Concrete:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray

and CP 672.4. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Parallel to Ribs:

a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0049; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Sprayand CP 672.

b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0184; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.5. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Perpendicular to Ribs, Not Cut to

Fit:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0042; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray

and CP 672.b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0045; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.

2.03 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLSA. Blank Openings:

1. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve.B. Penetrations By:

1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1408; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8071; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8079; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.d. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8013; Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block.

2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1054; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1164; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1206; Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.3. Cable Trays with Electrical Cables:

a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4011; Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block.b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4060; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.4. Insulated Pipes:

a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent FirestopSealant.

b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5029; Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent FirestopSealant.

c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5096; Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent FirestopSealant.

d. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5096; Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent FirestopSealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, or CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant.

5. HVAC Ducts, Insulated:a. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-7156; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop

Sealant.2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.



1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or that has F Rating equal to fire rating ofpenetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all otherspecified requirements.

2.05 MATERIALSA. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound

and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following:1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc; Product FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.b. Hilti, Inc; Product Cp 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.c. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 620 Fire Foamt: www.us.hilti.com.d. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.e. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.

B. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound; conforming to the following:1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc; Product FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.b. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 620 Fire Foamt: www.us.hilti.com.c. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.d. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.

C. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainlesssteel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to thefollowing:1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 643N Firestop Collar: www.us.hilti.com.b. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 643N Firestop Collar: www.us.hilti.com.c. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 643N Firestop Collar: www.us.hilti.com.

D. Firestop Devices: Sleeve and sealing material, intended to be set in concrete block walls.1. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 653 Firestop Speed Sleeve: www.us.hilti.com.2. Provide additional sealants as required by the manufacturer.

E. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming tothe following:1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick: www.us.hilti.com.b. Hilti, Inc; Product CP 658T Firestop Plug]: www.us.hilti.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that couldadversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings.B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.C. Install labeling required by code.



3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION


07 90 05 - 1JOINT SEALERS

JOINT SEALERSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sealants and joint backing.B. Precompressed foam sealers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.1.06 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that complywith the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):1. Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

B. Elastomeric Joint Sealants: Liquid applied, chemically curing; ASTM C 920.1. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that

will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR177.2600.

2. Multicomponent Nonsag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-1.3. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-2.4. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-3.5. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing RTV Silicone Sealant ES-4.6. Multicomponent Nonsag Polyurea Sealant ES-5.7. Multicomponent Nonsag Polyurea Filler ES-6.

C. Latex Sealant LS-1: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.D. Joint-Sealant Backing:

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.1.08 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Dow Corning Corporation3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.5. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.6. Meadows, W.R., Inc

B. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920):1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.2. Red Devil; Siliconized Acrylic Construction Grade (35 Year) Sealant: www.reddevil.com.3. Sherwin-Williams Company; Shermax Urethanized Elastomeric Sealant:

www.sherwin-williams.com.4. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.

C. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex, Inc.;Sonolac .

2.02 SEALANTSA. Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction

joints in concrete slabs.1. Joint Sealant: ES-5.

B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Exterior perimeter joints between wall and frames of doors and1. Joint Sealant: ES-1.

C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-3: Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal trafficsurfaces of brick pavers, ceramic tile, stone paving units, concrete tile.1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable polysulfide sealant.2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.1. Joint Sealant: ES-3.

E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-5: Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, andisolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.1. Joint Sealant: ES-3.

F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-6: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,1. Joint Sealant: ES-3.2. Joint-Sealant Color: White.

G. Joint-Sealant Application JS-7: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior partitions.1. Joint Sealant: ES-3.

H. Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames ofinterior doors and windows.1. Joint Sealant: ES-3.

I. Joint-Sealant Application JS-9: HVAC joints.1. Joint Sealant: ES-2.

J. Joint-Sealant Application JS-10: Non-porous material to non-porous material.1. Joint Sealant: ES-4.



2. Joint-Sealant Color: Clear.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.G. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION




08 11 13 - 1HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

HOLLOW METAL FRAMESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.C. ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007 (R2011).D. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.E. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.G. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

H. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

I. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors andSteel Frames; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.115).

J. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009(ANSI).

K. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.L. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.M. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.N. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.O. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.P. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; current edition.Q. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and onecopy of referenced standards/guidelines.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced

document that prescribes installation requirements.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specifiedrequirements.



B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion andadverse effects on factory applied painted finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FRAMES - GENERAL

A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the

following requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolledsteel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steelconforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as

indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard.4. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and

NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordancewith specified requirements.

5. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door inaccordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. General:1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.3. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high

to fill opening without cutting masonry units.4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,

flush with top.C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.D. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.E. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding

door.F. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and

as indicated on drawings.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed.B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted

corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00.D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center

mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.04 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3, manufacturer's standard coating.

1. Color: As indicated on drawings.C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.




A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related

requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.C. Coordinate installation of hardware.D. Coordinate installation of glazing.E. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION




08 14 16 - 1FLUSH WOOD DOORS

FLUSH WOOD DOORSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. AWMAC (GIS) - Guarantee and Inspection Services Program; current edition at

www.awmac.com/gis.php.C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005,8th Ed., Version 2.0.

D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection

Association; 2008.F. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.G. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.H. WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers

Association; 2013. (ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A)1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type andcharacteristics.

B. Specimen warranty.C. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain,

stain color, and sheen.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.E. Warranty, executed in Carl R. Darnall Army Medical Center's name.


this section with minimum three years of documented experience.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.06 WARRANTYA. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.2. Buell Door Company3. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.



4. Mohawk Flush Door, Inc.5. Weyerhaeuser Company6. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.7. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.8. Provide equal to listed products.

2.02 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Standard Duty performance, in accordance withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.

1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.2. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish .

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORESA. Non-Rated Solid Core: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above.

2.04 DOOR FACINGSA. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade in accordance with quality

standard indicated, plain sliced (flat cut), with book match between leaves of veneer, runningmatch of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.2. "Pair Match" each pair of doors; "Set Match" pairs of doors within 10 feet of each other

when doors are closed.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink styletamper proof screws.

B. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped at face edge.2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with

hardware requirements and dimensions.C. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORSA. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5

- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.b. Stain: As selected by Multatech Architects Engineers.c. Sheen: Flat.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.



C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION




08 31 00 - 1ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Access door and frame units, non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details ofadjoining work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Doors:1. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra products Company.2. Dur-Red products.3. J. L. Industries, Inc.4. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company6. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.7. Nystrom, Inc. .

2.03 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSA. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground

flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to beinstalled in.

2.04 WALL AND CEILING UNITSA. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints

welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements withassemblies that units are to be installed in.1. Material: Steel.2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.3. Material: Steel.

B. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel.2. Door panels: 0.60 inch single thickness steel sheet.3. Steel Finish: Primed.4. Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's standard colors.5. Minimum Sizes:

a. Walls: 18" x 18" inches.b. Ceilings: 18" x 18" inches.

6. Hardware:a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.b. Hinge: Non-Fire-Rated Units: 175 degree steel hinges with removable pin.c. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with pin.

7. Prime coat with alkyd primer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.


08 31 00 - 2ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

END OF SECTION


08 33 26 - 1OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES

OVERHEAD COILING GRILLESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, electric operation.B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2014.D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays

Rated 600 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005), with errata,2008.

E. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical

equipment.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures,

adjustment and alignment procedures.D. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments

required.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of grilleand operating hardware assembly.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters LaboratoriesInc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Overhead Coiling Grilles:1. Lift Ready Coiling Grille: http://chiohd.com/garage-doors/rolling-steel/coiling-grilles/9300.

2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTSA. Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft.

1. Finish: Anodized, Clear color.2. Mounting: Within framed opening.

B. Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links.1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch diameter.2. Bar spacing: 1-1/2 inch on center.3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch diameter.4. Spacer spacing: 3-1/4 inch on center.5. Link spacing: 6 inch on center.6. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation.7. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion.


08 33 26 - 2OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES

C. Guides: Extruded aluminum angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap-on trim,mounting brackets of same metal.

D. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producingtorque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATIONA. Electric Operators:

1. Mounting: Side mounted.2. Motor Enclosure:3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty.4. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.5. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.6. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second.7. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.8. Manual override in case of power failure.

B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for eachoperator.1. 24 volt circuit.2. Surface mounted.

C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wiredto stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.E. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

3.02 TOLERANCESA. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean grille and components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION


08 43 13 - 1ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.B. Aluminum doors and frames.C. Perimeter sealant.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.C. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflectionof lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details .B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.

C. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for eachdoor, cross-referenced to door identification numbers on drawing sheet A6.1.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specifiedrequirements.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in AAFES,HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed at

B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminumglazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain thisminimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTYA. Correct defective Work within a five year period after the Date of Substantial Completion.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.



C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.


A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Doors:1. Kawneer North America; Tri-Fab 451: www.kawneer.com.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members

with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1/4 inch thick glazing.2. Glazing Position: Front-set.3. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges.4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to

receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;reinforced as required for imposed loads.

5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period withoutcausing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other buildingelements.

7. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, withoutdamage to components or deterioration of seals.

8. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.2.04 FINISHES

A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than0.7 mils thick.


A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.



F. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity ofthermal barrier.

G. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot besatisfactorily repaired.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,

whichever is less.B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION




08 71 00 - 1DOOR HARDWARE

DOOR HARDWAREPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hardware for wood doors.B. Thresholds.C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2013 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers

Association; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2013 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).F. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).G. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders

Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.7).H. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).I. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).J. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000;

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13).K. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).L. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers

Association; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).M. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).N. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.115).O. BHMA A156.115W - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with

Wood or Steel Frames; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.115W).P. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.Q. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;

Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.R. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2015.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware will be

installed upon.B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products

requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.



C. Convey Carl R. Darnall Army Medical Center's keying requirements to manufacturers.D. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules and catalog

cuts .2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditionsrequiring special attention.

C. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, andinspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

D. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM by security shipmentdirect from hardware supplier.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inAAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's name and registered with manufacturer.

F. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM'suse in maintenance of project.1. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special

hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial doorhardware with three years of experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to

match hardware schedule.1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty for all hardware components.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Manufacturer: Best Access Systems., www.bestaccess.comB. Other Products: As specified in this section.C. Substitutions: With owner approval only.

2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERALA. Provide hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable

codes, and secure to the extent indicated.B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities.3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.

D. Finishes: Provide door hardware of the same finish unless otherwise indicated.1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).2. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.



2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.

1. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, seven-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".2.04 HINGES

A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.

B. Manufacturers - Hinges:1. Heavy weight stainless steel hinges with non-removable pins at all exterior openings

unless otherwise indicated2. Ball bearing3. Quantity of three hinges for doors 90 inches or less in height. Provide additional hinges at

taller doors as required by door manufacturer.4. 626 satin chrome plated on stainless steel base at exterior. 652 brushed chrome plating on

steel base at interior.2.05 PUSH/PULLS

A. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6.2.06 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, seven-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.

2.07 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETSA. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows.

2.08 MORTISE LOCKSETSA. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.13, and as follows:

2.09 EXIT DEVICESA. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3.B. Manufacturers - Exit Devices:

1. Equip devices with dogging feature.2. Provide stainless steel rods and gravity type latch bolts at all vertical rod applications.

Aluminum rods and painted rods with spring required latch bolts are not acceptable.



3. Lever trim design shall be vandal resistant with forged escutcheon and preotected cylinder. Lever shall match lockset lever design.

4. All devices shall have an anti-pick latchbolt design.5. 626 satin chrome plated on stainless steel base for all components located on the push

side of the opening unless indicated otherwise.2.10 CLOSERS

A. Manufacturers - Surface Mounted Closers:1. Mount closers on non-public side of door opening. Closers shall be non-handed and

non-sized for ease of installation. Handed units are not acceptable.2. Provide all functions and options as indicated. Do not provide back check relief valves.3. Provide with 1-1/2" minimum bore.4. 689 powder coated finish to match remainder of hardware.

2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERSA. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise

indicated.1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide

overhead stop.3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature

of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.2.12 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS

A. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of

pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets oneach door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors.

2. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top,sides, and meeting stiles of pairs.

3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.B. Thresholds: Complying with BHMA A156.21.

1. At each exterior door, provide an accessible threshold.C. Fasteners At Exterior Locations: Non-corroding.D. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds:

1. Provide aluminum thresholds at man doors as scheduled.2. Do not provide weatherstripping with exposed fasteners that project off the face of the

aluminum extrusion.2.13 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Protection Plates:1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer.2. Mop Plates: Provide at toilet room doors.

B. Drip Guard: Provide projecting drip guard over all exterior doors unless they are under aprojecting roof or canopy.

2.14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTSA. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes.2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities.3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.

2.15 KEYINGA. Door Locks: Master keyed.



1. Include construction keying and control keying with removable core cylinders.2. Key to existing keying system.

B. Supply keys in the following quantities:1. 5 control keys and 10 extra cylinder cores.2. 2 change keys for each lock.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames arepresent and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correctcharacteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item.

1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for ArchitecturalHardware for Steel Doors and Frames."

2. For Wood Doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardwarefor Wood Flush Doors."

E. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant on each point of contactwith floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steelcountersunk screws.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware

and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsand as specified.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.B. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per

manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannotbe cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.07 SCHEDULE - REFER TO DRAWING SHEET A6.1.END OF SECTION




08 80 00 - 1GLAZING

GLAZINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glass.B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.F. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GLAZING UNITS

A. Type G-1 - Single Vision Glazing:1. Application: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Type: Annealed float glass.3. Tint: Clear.4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

B. Type G-2 - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.1. Application: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.

2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.3. Tint: Clear.4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2.02 GLASS MATERIALSA. Float Glass Manufacturers:

1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.

B. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3.2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and Kind FT.3. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with requirements indicated for

wind load design regardless of thickness indicated.2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers:1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.


08 80 00 - 2GLAZING

4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTMC 864 Option I;.


A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.E. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


08 91 00 - 1LOUVERS

LOUVERSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and ControlAssociation International, Inc.; 2012.

B. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices; 2013.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required,and frames.

B. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performancecriteria.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LOUVERS

A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511.1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load as required by

code without damage or permanent deformation.2. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated

intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested inaccordance with AMCA 500-L.

3. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutterrecessed into both jambs of frame.

4. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers.B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, formed galvanized steel sheet construction, with

intermediate mullions matching frame.1. Blades: Straight.2. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous

recessed caulking channel each side.3. Steel Finish: Superior performing organic coatings, finished after fabrication.

C. Operable Louvers: Operable horizontal blades, extruded aluminum construction.1. Free Area: Refer to mechanical requirements, minimum.2. Movable Blades: Straight, pivoted at, with vinyl, rubber, or polyethylene blade edge and

jamb seals; rattle-free linkage.3. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous

recessed caulking channel each side.4. Aluminum Thickness: Frame 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum; blades 12 gage, 0.0808 inch

minimum.5. Finish: Baked enamel, finished after fabrication.6. Color: Match wall panel color.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Blank-Off Panels: Same material as louver, painted black on exterior side; provide where duct

connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off louver area outside duct.B. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw

attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.C. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel.


08 91 00 - 2LOUVERS

D. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in onepiece per location.

E. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensionsare as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install louvers level and plumb.C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion

of moisture to exterior.D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating

joints.3.04 CLEANING

A. Strip protective finish coverings.B. Clean surfaces and components.

END OF SECTION


09 21 16 - 1GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Metal channel ceiling framing.D. Acoustic insulation.E. Gypsum wallboard.F. Joint treatment and accessories.G. Level and type of finish.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer

Units; 2010 (Revised).B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications

for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

K. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.L. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior

Substrate Sheets; 2014.M. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement

Substrate Sheets; 2014.N. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.O. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.P. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.Q. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.R. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.S. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.T. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.



1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system.B. Samples: Submit two samples of gypsum board finished with proposed flat tape bed

application, 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating finish color and wall finish.1. Do not proceed without approved finish samples.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and

finishing, with minimum three years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following

characteristics:1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:1. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.3. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Perforated studs are not acceptable.3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.D. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened asindicated on drawings.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.5. Temple-Inland Inc: www.templeinland.com.6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.



3. Paper-Faced Products:a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X

Gypsum Wallboard.b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board.c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board.d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock.e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard.f. Temple-Inland Inc; Gypsumboard and Gypsum Board Fire Resistant Panels Type X

and Type TGC.g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.

4. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: (All wet walls)a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc.b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard.e. Temple-Inland Inc; ComfortGuard Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.f. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels AR.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3

inches.B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead

at exposed panel edges.3. Products:

a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com.

C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for projectconditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.2. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.4. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.5. Chemical hardening type compound.

D. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosionresistant.

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

F. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size tosuit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

G. Finsh: Level 5 - Flat wall finishPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.



B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain

clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs withcontinuous bridging.

D. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet partitions.5. Toilet accessories.6. Wall mounted door hardware.7. TV monitors

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board except face layer ofnon-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination.

D. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board withsealant.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENTA. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint

compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areasspecifically indicated.

2. Level 2: In utility areas and on backing board to receive tile finish.D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.



E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended bymanufacturer.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

in any direction.END OF SECTION




09 22 16 - 1NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal partition, ceiling, and soffit framing.B. Framing accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.C. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;2007 (Reapproved 2013).

E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society forProtective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide data describing framing member materials and finish, product criteria,

load charts, and limitations.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdeitrich.com.2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.3. Marino: www.marinoware.com.4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALSA. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size

and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.1. Studs: C shaped with flat or formed webs.2. Perforated studs are unacceptable.3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened asindicated on drawings.

D. Tracks and Runners: Same material and thickness as studs .



E. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose; complyingwith applicable requirements of ASTM C754.

F. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws.G. Sheet Metal Backing: 0.036 inch thick, galvanized.H. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required.B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUD FRAMINGA. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754.B. Extend partition framing as indicated in Partition Schedule.C. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between

top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections;do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches on center.E. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall

studs.F. Install studs vertically at 16 inches on center.G. Align stud web openings horizontally.H. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld.I. Stud splicing is not permissible.J. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs.K. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches from each side

of openings.L. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames; install supports and

attachments.M. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical, mechanical, and other

work to be placed within or behind stud framing.N. Blocking: Use wood blocking secured to studs. Provide blocking for support of plumbing

fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and opening frames.O. Use sheet metal backing for reinforcement of all other items requiring support.

3.03 CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMINGA. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754.B. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers

with other work.C. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.D. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Space hangers as

required to limit deflection to criteria indicated. Use rigid hangers at exterior soffits.



E. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch on center, and not more than 6 inches fromwall surfaces. Lap splice securely.

F. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full loadto hangers.

G. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches fromperimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely.

H. Reinforce openings in suspension system that interrupt main carrying channels or furringchannels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening.

I. Laterally brace suspension system.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

END OF SECTION




09 30 00 - 1TILING

TILINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Paver glazed and wall tile..B. Waterproof membrane for thin-settile installations..C. Metal edge stips installed as part of tile installations.D. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.E. Thresholds.F. Ceramic accessories.G. Ceramic trim.H. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile - Version; 2014.1. ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.2. ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland CementMortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

3. ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reapproved 2010).

9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout inTilework; 1999 (Reapproved 2010).

10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation ofCementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Revised).

11. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

12. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of LoadBearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone;2005 (Reaffirmed 2010).

13. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance CementGrouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised).

14. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranesfor Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.

15. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile - Version;2013.1.


09 30 00 - 2TILING

B. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity,and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products

C. ASTM C648 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic TileD. ASTM C650 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical SubstancesE. ASTM C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of

Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter MethodF. ASTM C1027 - Standard Test Method for Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed

Ceramic TileG. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.B. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size

illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain

removal methods.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Extra Tile: 20 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

F. Mockups for each form of construction.1. Provide 3' x 3' mock up of each type of tile application.2. Install on plywood sheet for owner approval.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of

five years of documented experience.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Refer finish schedule on finish schedule sheet A5.1 .

B. Glazed Wall Tile and trim shapes: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:1. Coved base, bullnose cap.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Thresholds: Satin Anodized Aluminum Thresholds and Transition Strips.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit heightthreshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.


09 30 00 - 3TILING

2.03 ADHESIVE MATERIALSA. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type.B. Tile Setting Adhesive: Elastomeric, waterproof, liquid applied.

2.04 MORTAR MATERIALSA. Mortar Bond Coat Materials for Thin-Set Installations:

1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.2.05 GROUTS

A. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.1. 100% solids epoxy non-sagging grout.

2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not

intended as waterproofing.1. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum.2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum.

B. Provide cementitious backer board behind all tile applications. (specified elsewhere)PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofsetting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommendedby tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's

instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.E. Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized

roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tapeat all joints and corners with material used to set tiles.

F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer'sinstructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI

A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.


09 30 00 - 4TILING

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make groutjoints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.G. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.J. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.K. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODSA. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or

latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,using membrane at toilet rooms.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION


09 51 00 - 1SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.C. Supplementary acoustical insulation above ceiling.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved

2005).1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percentprior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.B. Acoustical Panels Type As indicated on drawing sheet A1.10:

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.2. Panel Edge: Square.3. Surface Color: White.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Manufacturers:

1. Same as for acoustical units.B. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking

components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips asrequired.



C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;intermediate-duty; heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Finish: As indicated on drawing sheet A1.10.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling

system flatness requirement specified.B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.B. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently.H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.

G. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door.



3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION




09 60 00 - 1TERRAZZO REPAIR

TERRAZZO REPAIRPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements for repair od existing terrazzo flooring1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for eachtype of terrazzo, accessory items, and materials.1. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s written certification that terrazzo materials meet or

exceed specified NTMA properties.2. Samples: Match existing adjacent terrazzo in pattern and color; submit two 6" square

samples of each pattern of terrazzo.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NTMA Standards: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of National Terrazzoand Mosaic Association, Inc. (NTMA), as outlined in the “Terrazzo Specifications and DesignGuide” (available at www.ntma.com).

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except as modified to comply with NTMA requirementsfor compressive strength. Obtain cement from a single source for each required color.1. Provide non-staining white cement for terrazzo matrix.2. Provide standard gray cement for underbed.

B. Sand: Comply with ASTM C 33.C. Water: Clean, potable, free of oil, soluble salts or other deleterious substances.D. Aggregate: Natural, sound, crushed marble chips without excessive flats or flakes, complying

with NTMA requirements.1. Colors and gradation of aggregate sizes, as required, to match the existing terrazzo.

E. Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, resistant to alkalis and non-fading. Mixpigments with matrix to provide required colors.

F. Underbed Reinforcement: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2" X 2" WO.3 X WO.3 (16 ASW gageor 0.0625" diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A82, except for minimum wire size.

G. Curing Compound: Liquid-membrane-forming compound, ASTM C 309, Type 1.2.02 TERRAZZO ACCESSORIES

A. Divider Strips: Depth and style required for terrazzo type and thickness. Width, material andcolor as indicated. Angle or "T"-type for adhesive bonding to substrate.1. Unless otherwise indicated, use white zinc alloy divider strips with 1/4" wide top.


A. Clean and prepare substrate to comply with NTMA specifications for type of terrazzo applicationindicated. Clean substrate of loose chips and foreign matter. Grind concrete substrate toprovide surfaces within tolerances required by NTMA for type of terrazzo application.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. For cementitious terrazzo, comply with NTMA recommendations for proportioning mixes,

installation of strips, and for placing, curing, grinding, grouting and finishing.1. Place and finish terrazzo around obstructions to achieve continuous color, pattern and

finish.


09 60 00 - 2TERRAZZO REPAIR

2. Install divider and accessory strips in adhesive setting bed, in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions, without voids below strips. Provide mechanical anchorage asrequired for adequate attachment of strips to substrate.

3.03 CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZOA. Sand Cushion Terrazzo: Comply with NTMA Technical Manual and "Guide Specification for

Sand Cushion Terrazzo". Prepare sub-slab surfaces to insure positive bonding with underbed.Thoroughly clean areas of foreign matter immediately before placing bond coat. Placeunderbed while bond coat is still plastic.

B. Surfacing: Grout cured terrazzo topping in accordance with NTMA specifications. Delay grindingand finishing until heavy trade work is completed and construction traffic through the area isrestricted. Finish by fine grinding with abrasive grit of size specified by NTMA, or as otherwiserequired to match existing adjacent terrazzo.

3.04 CLEANING, SEALING, AND PROTECTIONA. Clean terrazzo after installation and finishing operations are completed, complying with sealer

manufacturer's instructions.1. Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces to comply with sealer manufacturer's

instructions.2. Protect terrazzo from damage and wear during construction operations and until formally

accepted by owner.3.05 FINAL CLEANING

A. Clean terrazzo as recommended by manufacturer of sealer and machine buff when area isready for occupancy.

END OF SECTION


09 65 00 - 1RESILIENT FLOORING/BASE

RESILIENT FLOORING/BASEPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Resilient tile flooring.B. Resilient base.C. Installation accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2008.B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;

2011.C. ASTM F970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit; 2007 (Reapproved 2011).D. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved

2014)e1.E. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2002.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.B. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Multatech

Architects Engineers's initial selection if a different manufacturer is selected.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Flooring Material: 400 square feet of each type and color.2. Extra Wall Base: 100 linear feet of each type and color.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness.1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type

specified.2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 648.3. Size: 12 by 12 inch.4. Thickness: 0.125 inch.5. Pattern: Product as scheduled on Drawings.6. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.b. Provide equal as approved by owner.

2.02 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.

1. Height: 4 inch.2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.



3. Finish: Satin.4. Length: 4 foot sections.5. Color: Product as scheduled on Drawings.6. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.7. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation

by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtaininstructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturerand adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.D. Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.D. Fit joints tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to producetight joints.

I. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern.



3.04 TILE FLOORINGA. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless

manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

3.05 RESILIENT BASEA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.C. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION




09 90 00 - 1PAINTING AND COATING

PAINTING AND COATINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints and other coatings.C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated, including the following:1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.3. Surfaces inside cabinets.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.8. Ceramic and other tiles.9. Glass.10. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.11. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2014.C. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.B. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 12" x 12" inch in size illustrating range of colors and

textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled for on site approval.C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated

surfaces.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.2. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years experience.



B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified withminimum three years experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F

for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.


A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extentpossible.

B. Paints:1. Glidden Professional, a product of PPG Architectural Coatings:

www.gliddenprofessional.com.2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.3. Kelly-Moore Paint, Co.4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.5. Sherwin-Williams Co.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERALA. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily anduniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.

3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedureis specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of topcoats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primercategorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.



2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di

(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylenechloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.F. Colors: As indicated on drawings

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Paint WI-OP-2L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat:

1. One coat of latex primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex enamel.3. Eggshell: One coat of latex enamel.

B. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:1. Touch-up with latex primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

C. Paint CI-OP-3E - Concrete/Masonry, Epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat:1. One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer.2. Gloss: Two coats of catalyzed epoxy enamel.

D. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specificallyindicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify General Contractor of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.3. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime

defects after repair.G. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and

rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.H. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,

seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealerhas dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25percent with thinner.

I. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clearsealer.

J. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.G. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain

before set. Wipe excess from surface.H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


09 93 00 - 1STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Transparent wood finish systems for field application.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Base Manufacturer:1. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.

B. Sanding Sealers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate,use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

2.02 INTERIOR TRANSPARENT FINISH SYSTEMSA. Interior Wood - Oil Stain with Clear Finish: For doors

1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer.2. Open-Grained Wood: Fill and stain simultaneously with filler mixture as specified by

manufacturer, using Tonetic Oil Wood Stain.3. Close-Grained Wood: 1 coat Tonetic Oil Wood Stain.4. 1 coat Sanding Sealer recommended by manufacturer.5. Satin : 2 coats Varmor Clear Urethane Finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION (SEE SECTION 09 90 00)END OF SECTION


09 93 00 - 2STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING


09 97 10 - 1FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELSPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide fiberglass reinforced panels and accessories as specified herein, and as needed for acomplete and proper installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Use of adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and themethods needed for performance of the Work of this Section.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with the recommendations and instructions of the Manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 WALL PANELS

A. Where scheduled on Drawings, provide “Standard” fiberglass reinforced panels asmanufactured by Marlite, or an approved equal.1. Size: 4'-0" by 8'-0".2. Sheet Thickness: 3/36"-inches.3. Fire Rating: Class A in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Color: Refer Drawings.5. Finish Texture: Pebbled.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Trim: Rigid PVC trim, in color matching respective wall panels, as supplied by panel

manufacturer for outside/inside corners, vertical joints, openings, outside angles, end caps, andceiling intersections.

B. Adhesive: Equal to C-551 Marlite FRP Adhesive or as recommended by manufacturer.C. Sealant: Equal to Marlite silicone 251 color matched or as recommended by manufacturer.D. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correctconditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed untilunsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Installation of panels shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

and instructions.B. Promptly, upon completion of installation, clean all exposed surfaces with methods and

materials recommended by the manufacturer of the panels.END OF SECTION


09 97 10 - 2FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS


10 14 00 - 1SIGNAGE

SIGNAGEPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Room and door signs.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009

(ANSI).D. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.B. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the

drawing room number on schedule.2. Submit for approval by AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM through General Contractor prior

to fabrication.C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.D. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in maintenance

of project.1. Curved Sign Media Suction Cups: One for each 100 signs; for removing media.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflictingrequirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for doorways and opening shown on drawings.1. Refer to standard building signage.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


10 14 00 - 2SIGNAGE

2.03 SIGN LOCATIONSA. Refer drawing sheet A2.1.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's/Architect'sinstructions.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.END OF SECTION


10 26 01 - 1WALL AND CORNER GUARDS

WALL AND CORNER GUARDSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Corner guards.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

B. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2014.


A. Refer drawings2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: polycarbonate with clear color.1. Size: 3 inches.2. Corner: Square.3. Color: clear.4. Length: 48"5. Preformed end caps.6. Provide at all exposed gypsum board outside corners including door jambs.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.B. Pre-drill holes for attachment.C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.


A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, securedrigidly in position to wall framing members only.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.B. Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION


10 26 01 - 2WALL AND CORNER GUARDS


10 44 00 - 1FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.C. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination

requirements.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher

ingredients.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicablecodes, whichever is more stringent.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.1. Class: A:B:C.2. Size: 10 pound.3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.4. Provide extinguishers labeled by testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction

for the purpose specified and indicated.2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.B. Cabinet Configuration: Surface, recessed and semi-recessed type, as indicated.

1. Sized to accommodate extinguisher.2. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim

and door stiles.3. Provide recessed cabinets in the Administration building. (except mechanical and utility

areas)C. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.E. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, white color.G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.


10 44 00 - 2FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

1. Provide wall mounted brackes in utility, shop areas and mechanical rooms.a. Size to accomodate extinguisher weight.

B. Graphic Identification: As required by local code and Fire Marshall.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install cabinets plumb and levelin wall openings, 48 inches from finished floor to center of

cabinet handle.C. Secure rigidly in place.D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.E. Position cabinet signage at locations directed by Fire Marshall.

END OF SECTION


22 05 16 - 1EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Flexible pipe connectors.B. Expansion joints and compensators.C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service; 2007a.B. EJMA (STDS) - EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; Tenth Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and perassembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wiresin braid.

2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximumexpansion compensation.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, special

procedures, and external controls.E. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion

joints, anchors, and guides.F. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to UL requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING

A. Manufacturers:1. Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com.2. Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com.

B. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.C. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.D. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F.E. Joint: Flanged.F. Size: Use pipe sized units.G. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.

2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPINGA. Manufacturers:



1. Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com.2. Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com.

B. Inner Hose: Bronze.C. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.D. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F.E. Joint: Flanged.F. Size: Use pipe sized units.G. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.H. Application: Copper piping.

2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS - SINGLE SPHERE, ELBOW COMPENSATORA. Manufacturers:

1. Mercer Rubber Company: www.mercer-rubber.com.2. Metraflex Company: www.metraflex.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Body: Teflon.C. Pressure Rating, Sizes 3/4 Inch to 2 Inch: 150 psi and 210 degrees F.D. Pressure Rating, Sizes 1-1/2 Inch to 12 Inch: 150 psi and 250 degrees F.E. Maximum Compression: 1/2 inch.F. Maximum Elongation: 3/8 inch.G. Maximum Offset: 3/8 inch.H. Maximum Angular Movement: 15 degrees.I. Joint: Tapped steel flanges.J. Size: Use pipe sized units.K. Accessories: Control rods.L. Application: Steel piping 2 inches and over.

2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS - TWO-PLY BRONZE BELLOWS TYPEA. Manufacturers:


B. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides.C. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F.D. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches.E. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch.F. Joint: Soldered.G. Size: Use pipe sized units.H. Application: Copper piping.

2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS - LOW PRESSURE COMPENSATOR WITH TWO-PLY BRONZEBELLOWSA. Manufacturers:


B. Working Pressure: 75 psi.



C. Maximum Temperatures: 250 degrees F.D. Maximum Compression: 1/2 inch.E. Maximum Extension: 5/32 inch.F. Joint: Soldered.G. Size: Use pipe sized units.H. Application: Copper or steel piping 3 inches and under.

2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS - COPPER WITH PACKED SLIDING SLEEVEA. Working Pressure: 125 psi.B. Maximum Temperature: 250 degrees F.C. Joint: Flanged.D. Size: Use pipe sized units.E. Application: Copper or steel piping 2 inches and over.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) Standards.C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment. Provide line

size flexible connectors.D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent

to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicatedotherwise.

E. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement is directedalong axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast connections orapparatus.

F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provideloops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.

END OF SECTION




22 05 53 - 1IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Stencils.D. Pipe Markers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2007.B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,

function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. Coordinate with HFPA &CRDAMC-FM to insure numbering system(s) are compatible with current building system.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Control Panels: Nameplates.B. Instrumentation: Tags.C. Piping: Tags.D. Pumps: Nameplates.E. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.F. Tanks: Nameplates.G. Thermostats: Nameplates.H. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

2.03 NAMEPLATESA. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.3. Background Color: Black.

2.04 TAGSA. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting

background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth

edges.



2.05 PIPE MARKERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.3. MIFAB, Inc.: www.mifab.com.4. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.

B. Comply with ASME A13.1.C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification offluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backingand printed markings.

E. Color code as follows:1. Safety Yellow: Non-potable Water Lines.2. Safety Blue: Domestic Water Lines.3. Safety Green: Sewer Lines.4. Black: Condensate.

F. Service Abbreviation:1. Upper Left Hand Corner:

a. Hot Water Supply - HWSb. Hot Water Return - HWRc. Domestic Cold Water - DCWd. Domestic Hot Water - DHWe. Non-potable Water - NW

2. Upper Right Hand Corner:a. All valves numbered consecutively (not by system).

3. Lower Left Hand Corner:a. Building designation.

4. Lower Right Hand Corner:a. Space number where valve is located.


A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply withsufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.E. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.

1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,

adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, andat each obstruction.

F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or stencils. Use tags on piping

3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear



view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runsincluding risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration ofstructure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

H. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate incorner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION




22 07 16 - 1PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Equipment insulation.B. Covering.C. Breeching insulation.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPING: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007

(Reapproved 2013).E. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.F. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;

2013.G. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2015.H. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.I. ASTM C 592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type

Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2004.J. ASTM C1410 - Standard Specification for Cellular Melamine Thermal and Sound-Absorbing

Insulation; 2014.K. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.L. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.M. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.N. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to

Fungi; 2015.O. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.P. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for equipment scheduled.C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.




this section with not less than three years of documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBERA. Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.3. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.1. 'K' Value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM

C518.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.3. Maximum Water Vapor Absorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminizedfilm.1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M.2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.3. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

1. Compatible with insulation.F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.2.03 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic:1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.2. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.



c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTME96/E96M.

d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardantlagging adhesive.1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.


A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten

insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On

cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.G. Install cellular melamine with factory applied jackets with a manufacturer-approved adhesive

along seams, both straight lap joints and circumferential lap joints.1. Install seal over seams with factory-approved room temperature vulcanization (RTV)

silicone sealant to ensure a positive vapor barrier seal in outdoor and sanitary wash downenvironments.

H. For fiberglass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature, provide vaporbarrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied, and finish with glass cloth and vapor barrieradhesive.

I. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions,but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

J. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions withremovable sections and jackets.

K. Fiberglass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standardjackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth andadhesive.

L. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.



5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulatingmaterial suitable for the planned temperature range.

M. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.N. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.P. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so it can

be easily removed and replaced without damage.END OF SECTION


22 07 19 - 1PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping insulation.B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.D. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007

(Reapproved 2013).F. ASTM C 449/C 449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal

Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2000.G. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;

2013.I. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2007a.J. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.K. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2015.L. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.M. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for

Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing; 2010.N. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Thermal Insulation; 2007.O. ASTM C 610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation; 2005.P. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel; 2003.Q. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded

Rubber; 2014.R. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012.S. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.T. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.U. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.V. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.



B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials andthickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptableworkmanship and installation standards will be achieved.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with not less than three years of documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section and approved by manufacturer.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, andthickness.

B. Protect inuslation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in orginal wrapping.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.



2.02 GLASS FIBERA. Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered tojacket.1. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02perm-inches.

E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

1. Compatible with insulation.G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.H. Fibrous Glass Fabric:

1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.3. Weave: 5x5.



I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

J. Insulating Cement: ASTM C449.1. ASTM C449/C449M.

2.03 JACKETSA. PVC Plastic.

1. Manufacturers:a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardantlagging adhesive.1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

a. Compatible with insulation.C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including

fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansionjoints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outwardclinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness asadjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions atequipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:



1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

I. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating

material suitable for the planned temperature range.J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems:1. Domestic Hot Water Supply:

a. Glass Fiber Insulation:1) Pipe Size Range: to 1-1/2 inch.2) Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation:a. Glass Fiber Insulation:

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.2) Thickness: 1 inch.

3. Domestic Cold Water:a. Glass Fiber Insulation:

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.2) Thickness: 1 inch.

END OF SECTION


22 10 05 - 1PLUMBING PIPING

PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.3. Flanges, unions, and couplings.4. Pipe hangers and supports.5. Valves.6. Check.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).D. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2015.E. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999

(Reapproved 2014).F. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).G. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.H. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.I. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and

Copper Alloy Tube; 2010.J. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).K. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping Systems; 2012.L. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and

Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.M. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).N. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association; 2011

(ANSI/AWWA C606).O. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005

(ANSI/AWWA C651).P. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and

Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2009.Q. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron SoilPipe Institute; 2011

R. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.S. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2012.T. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.



U. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in ConcreteElements; 2013.

V. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and FittingsIndustry, Inc.; 2009.

W. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and FittingsIndustry, Inc.; 2011.

X. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; ManufacturersStandardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.

Y. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers StandardizationSociety of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2013.

Z. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; ManufacturersStandardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.

AA. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.

AB. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).AC. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this

project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor

regulations.D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,

potable water certification, water pressure rating.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), thatcomply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.



2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.

2.04 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGSA. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed

neoprene gaskets.2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housingsegments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts tosecure and compress gasket.1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.2. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized.3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees

F to 230 degrees F.4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.6. Manufacturers:

a. Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business: www.grinnell.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

D. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular

deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized forgalvanized pipe.

2. Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket.E. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,

water impervious isolation barrier.2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate

type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze

hangers.3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.

B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:1. Conform to ASME B31.9.



2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, splitring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp.7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Conform to ASME B31.9.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split

ring.3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger

rods.6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,

and concrete pier or steel support.8. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut,

nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.7. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.2.06 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Up To and Including 3 Inches:1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw,

solid wedge disc, solder ends.2.07 GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Up To and Including 3 Inches:



1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends.C. 2 Inches and Larger:

1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheeloperators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.08 BALL VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, threepiece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-outproof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.

2.09 BUTTERFLY VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.3. Crane Co.: www.cranecpe.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, cast or ductile iron body,nickel-plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 10position lever handle.

C. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valvesmounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.10 SWING CHECK VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Up to 2 Inches:1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder

ends.C. Over 2 Inches:

1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat,flanged or grooved ends.


A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.



C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular towalls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16.G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings.H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover.J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.N. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.P. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.Q. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.R. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified

solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying withNSF 61 and NSF 372.

S. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.T. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.U. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4

inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.V. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.



3.04 APPLICATIONA. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to

pipe.D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and

slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.

3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMA. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda

ash) or acid (hydrochloric).C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to

obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15

percent of outlets.E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water

entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.3.07 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:1. Metal Piping:

a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.

b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.

c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.

d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.

END OF SECTION




22 10 06 - 1PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drains.B. Floor drains.C. Cleanouts.D. Backflow preventers.E. Water hammer arrestors.F. Interceptors/separators.G. Thermostatic mixing valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2001 (R2007).

B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering;2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).

C. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society ofSanitary Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).

D. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure PrincipleFire Protection Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011.

E. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and FreezeResistance; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).

F. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).G. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.H. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.D. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly

and support requirements.F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow

preventers, water hammer arrestors.G. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.H. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: Two.2. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: Two.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with not less than three years documented experience.



1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content.

2.02 DRAINSA. See Plumbing Schedule.

2.03 CLEANOUTSA. See Plumbing Schedule.

2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies: www.wattsregulator.com.2. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com.

B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two

independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressurerelief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under backpressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gatevalves, strainer, and four test cocks.

2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORSA. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.2. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies: www.wattsregulator.com.3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com.4. PPP, Inc.: www.pppinc.net

B. Water Hammer Arrestors:1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201,

precharged suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F andmaximum 250 psi working pressure.

2.06 INTERCEPTORS/SEPARATORSA. See Plumbing Schedule.

2.07 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVESA. See Plumbing Schedule.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with

mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainagesystem.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of

domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems,premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.

F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.



G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold watersupply piping to quick closing valves.

END OF SECTION




22 30 00 - 1PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PLUMBING EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grease Trap1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; 2012.B. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals and RFI's, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,

tappings, and drains.D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data,

replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in AAFES,

HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's name and registered with manufacturer.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.06 CERTIFICATIONSA. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GREASE TRAP

A. See Plumbing Schedule on Sheet P1.1.2.02 CONDENSATE REMOVAL PUMP

A. See Plumbing Schedule on Sheet P1.1.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code,and complying with conditions of certification, if any.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.END OF SECTION


22 30 00 - 2PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


22 40 00 - 1PLUMBING FIXTURES

PLUMBING FIXTURESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sinks.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment;2009.

B. ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-ContainedMechanical Refrigeration; 2008.

C. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).

D. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2012.

E. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2013.

F. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); TheAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (R2013).

G. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014.H. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 10 - Submittals & RFI's, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,

trim, and finishes.C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.D. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in AAFES,

HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's name and registered with manufacturer.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for AAFES, HFPA and CRDAMC-FM's use in

maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Faucet Washers: Two sets of each type and size.3. Extra Lavatory Supply Fittings: One set of each type and size.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters LaboratoriesInc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in

place to protect fixtures and prevent use.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.


22 40 00 - 2PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL

A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.02 SINKSA. See Plumbing Schedule.


A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top

lavatories and sinks.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixturerough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and

escutcheons.C. Install components level and plumb.D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05, color to

match fixture.3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings beforerough-in and installation.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or

overflow.3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


23 05 53 - 1IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates.B. Tags.C. Stencils.D. Pipe Markers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2007.B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - for submittal procedures.B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.B. Ductwork: Stencilled painting.C. Piping: Pipe markers.D. Thermostats: Nameplates.

2.02 NAMEPLATESA. Manufacturers:

1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com.2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.4. Letter Color: White.5. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.6. Background Color: Black.7. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com.2. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.3. Brimar Industries, Inc.: www.pipemarker.com.4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.

2.04 STENCILSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.

B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:1. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.


23 05 53 - 2IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

2.05 PIPE MARKERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.3. MIFAB, Inc.: www.mifab.com.4. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.

B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification offluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backingand printed markings.


A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply withsufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.E. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.

1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,

adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, andat each obstruction.

F. Install ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with air handling unit identification number andarea served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure orenclosure, and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION


23 05 93 - 1TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance

Council; 2002.B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC

Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;2008.

C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standard for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of EnvironmentalSystems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.

D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and AirConditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for

approval within 30 days after award of Contract.B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be

followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Submit to Multatech Architects Engineers.2. Submit eight weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.3. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiencymeasurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment tobe tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.

c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recentcalibration date.

d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and pipingdrawings during the process.

e. Final test report forms to be used.f. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, andbalancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.1. Submit to the the Commissioning Authority within two weeks after completion of testing,

adjusting, and balancing.2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Multatech Architects Engineers and for inclusion in operating and maintenancemanuals.

4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index pageand indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduceddrawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, andindicating thermostat locations.

5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date ofcalibration.

6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a reportformat use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

7. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.



8. Include the following on the title page of each report:a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.d. Project name.e. Project location.f. Project Multatech Architects Engineers.g. Project Engineer.h. Project Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.3. SMACNA (TAB).4. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete workprior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.3. Certified by one of the following:

a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submitAABC National Performance Guaranty.

b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy

Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.D. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in Fort Hood, Texas.

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following

conditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters.5. Duct systems are clean of debris.6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.9. Air outlets are installed and connected.10. Duct system leakage is minimized.

B. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.3.03 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systemsand plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent of design tospace. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.



3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDUREA. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and

exhaust air quantities at site altitude.B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.C. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts

and noise.D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devicessuch as dampers and splitters.

E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

F. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for designconditions.

3.05 SCOPEA. Test, adjust, and balance the following:

1. Air Handling Units2. Fans 3. Air Inlets and Outlets

3.06 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTEDA. Air Moving Equipment:

1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number4. Serial number5. Air flow, specified and actual6. Return air flow, specified and actual7. Outside air flow, specified and actual8. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

B. Exhaust Fans:1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number4. Serial number5. Air flow, specified and actual6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

C. Air Distribution Tests:1. Room number/location2. Terminal type3. Terminal size4. Design air flow5. Test (final) air flow

END OF SECTION




23 07 13 - 1DUCT INSULATION

DUCT INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Duct insulation.B. Duct Liner.C. Insulation jackets.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2014.C. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2014.D. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.E. ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials

and Facings; 2008.F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.G. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to

Fungi; 2013.I. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.J. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials andthickness for each service, and locations.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section, with minimum 5 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanicaldamage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.





2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLEA. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure

sensitive rubber based adhesive.D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage, 0.0508 inch diameter.

2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGIDA. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.1. 'K' Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.3. Maximum Water Vapor Absorption: 5.0 percent.4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure

sensitive rubber based adhesive.2.04 JACKETS

A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardantlagging adhesive.

2.05 DUCT LINERA. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com.



B. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C1071; rigid boardand preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetatepolymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite.1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21.2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:

a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30.b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45.c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60.

C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916.D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with press-on head.


A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,

and expansion joints.D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of

insulation.E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above

finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.F. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrieradhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where

necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation

without disturbing wrapping.G. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing.3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct

size to allow for insulation thickness.



3.03 SCHEDULESA. Combustion Air Duct:

1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inches thick.B. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-inch

thickC. Outside Air Intake Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 2 inches thick.D. Supply Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 2-inches thick.E. Return Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick.F. Supply and Return Ducts Within 10 Feet of Air Handler: Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation,

1-1/2 inches thick (in lieu of external duct insulation).END OF SECTION


23 09 13 - 1INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thermostats.B. Automatic dampers.C. Damper operators.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2012.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2014.C. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2014.E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National

Fire Protection Association; 2015.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, andwritten detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicatingsize, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement,velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels,

thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, includingpanels, thermostats, and sensors.1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommendedcleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in AAFES,HFPA and CRDAMC-FM s name and registered with manufacturer.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer

experienced in design of this work and licensed at Fort Hood, Texas.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 5 years experience approved by manufacturer.D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.05 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters LaboratoriesInc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

2.02 CONTROL PANELSA. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls mounted

in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switchesflush on cabinet panel face.

B. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel.C. Provide common keying for all panels.

2.03 DAMPERSA. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D.B. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage,

0.1046 inch.C. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22

gage, 0.0299 inch, attached to minimum 1/2 inch shafts with set screws.D. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric inflatable mechanically attached, field replaceable.E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel.F. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.G. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.H. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 2000 ft/min and 4 inches wg.I. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg.J. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 degrees F.

2.04 DAMPER OPERATORSA. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent

greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum systempressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation.1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout

damper range.2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft damper section.

B. Electric Operators:1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end

switch.2.05 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS

A. Temperature Sensors:B. Humidity Sensors:

1. Elements: Accurate within 5 percent full range with linear output.2. Duct and Outside Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 - 100

percent relative humidity.C. Static Pressure Sensors:

1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input.2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in

temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F.3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3 percent.4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc.

D. Equipment Operation Sensors:



1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 incheswg.

2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential pressure switch piped across pump with adjustablepressure differential range of 8 to 60 psi.

3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers,adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

E. Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with adjustable crank armassembly connected to damper to transmit 0 - 100 percent damper travel.

F. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:1. General: Provide non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) CO2 sensors with integral transducers

and linear output.a. Linear, CO2 Concentration Range Display: 0 to 2000 ppm.b. Full Scale Accuracy: Plus/minus 100 ppm or plus/minus 5 percent of reading which

ever is higher.c. Maximum Response Time: 1 minute.d. Analog Output: 0-10 VDC.e. Rated Ambient Conditions:

1) Air Temperature: Range of 32 to 122 degrees F.2) Relative Humidity: Range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing).

2. Calibration Characteristics:a. Automatically compensating algorithm for sensor drift due to sensor degradation.b. Maximum Drift: 2 percent.c. User calibratable with a minimum calibration interval of 5 years.

3. Construction:a. Sensor Chamber: Non-corrosive material for neutral effect on carbon dioxide sample.b. Provide duct mounted sensors with duct probe designed to protect sensing element

from dust accumulation and mechanical damage.2.06 THERMOSTATS

A. Electric Room Thermostats:1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.2. Service: Cooling only.3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment and setpoint indication, without thermometer.

B. Line Voltage Thermostats:1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required.2. Dead band: Maximum 2 degrees F.3. Cover: Locking with set point adjustment and setpoint indication, without thermometer.4. Rating: Motor load.

C. Outdoor Reset Thermostat:1. Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling

range, adjustable setpoint.2. Scale range: -10 to 70 degrees F.

D. Immersion Thermostat:1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint

and adjustable throttling range.E. Airstream Thermostats:

1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint inmiddle of range and adjustable throttling range.

2. Averaging service remote bulb element: 7.5 feet.F. Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat:

1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch that trips if temperature sensedacross any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below setpoint,

2. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.



3. Provide one thermostat for every 20 sq ft of coil surface.G. Electric High Limit Duct Thermostat:

1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch that trips if temperature sensedacross any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above setpoint,

2. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.3. Provide one thermostat for every 20 sq ft of coil surface.

H. Heating/Cooling Valve Top Thermostats:1. Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded rubber diaphragm, remote bulb liquid filled

element, direct and reverse acting at differential pressure to 25 psig, cast housing withposition indicator and adjusting knob.

2.07 TRANSMITTERSA. Building Static Pressure Transmitter:

1. One pipe, direct acting, double bell, scale range 0.01 to 6.0 inch wg positive or negative,and sensitivity of 0.0005 inch wg. Transmit electronic signal to receiver with matchingscale range.

B. Pressure Transmitters:1. One pipe direct acting indicating type for gas, liquid, or steam service, range suitable for

system, proportional electronic output.C. Temperature Transmitters:

1. One pipe, directly proportional output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus orminus 1/2 percent of range for 200 degree F span and plus or minus 1 percent for 50degree F span, with 50 degrees F temperature range, compensated bulb, averagingcapillary, or rod and tube operation on 20 psig input pressure and 3 to 15 psig output.

D. Humidity Transmitters:1. One pipe, directly proportioned output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or

minus 1 percent for 70 percent relative humidity span, capable of withstanding 95 percentrelative humidity without loss of calibration.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar

components in other systems.E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components.G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems

equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate

60 inches above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to Section 26 27 26.C. Mount freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.D. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors

with sun shield.E. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements.F. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances.



G. Provide valves with position indicators and with pilot positioners where sequenced with othercontrols.

H. Provide mixing dampers of opposed blade construction arranged to mix streams. Provide pilotpositioners on mixed air damper motors. Provide separate minimum outside air damper sectionadjacent to return air dampers with separate damper motor.

I. Provide isolation (two position) dampers of parallel blade construction.J. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in locations at

outdoor temperatures.K. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing

angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipmentroom. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet andengraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.

L. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in"hand" position.

END OF SECTION




23 31 00 - 1HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal ductwork.B. Casing and plenums.C. Duct cleaning.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.C. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.D. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.C. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2015.D. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2015.E. ASTM A480/A480M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless

and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2014a.F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.G. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.H. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

I. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

J. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.K. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.L. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and

Culvert Pipe; 2015.M. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and

Culvert Pipe [Metric]; 2015.N. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber

Gaskets; 2012.O. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using

Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011.P. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.Q. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.R. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2012.S. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.



T. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in ConcreteElements; 2013.

U. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; NationalFire Protection Association; 2015.

V. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems;National Fire Protection Association; 2015.

W. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial CookingOperations; National Fire Protection Association; 2014.

X. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air ConditioningContractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.

Y. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and AirConditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

Z. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters LaboratoriesInc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration

prior to start of work for 2 pressure class and higher systems.B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes

in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved bymanufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in thissection, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant

manufacturers.B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.B. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. 2-inch pressure class, seal class A.

Exposed ductwork in mechanical rooms shall be 4-inch pressure class for durability.C. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.D. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized

steel.E. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.F. Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.G. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.H. Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.I. Combustion Air: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.



2.02 MATERIALSA. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B,

with G60/Z180 coating.B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration andcompatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class ofducts.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed indexof zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.4. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron-Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com.

C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, orcontinuously threaded.

D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.7. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round

duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook -Fundamentals.

C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide singlethickness turning vanes for duct widths up to 36-inches, and provide double thickness, airfoil,turning vanes for duct widths greater than 36-inches.

E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining isindicated.

F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).H. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame,

provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, paintedblack on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.

2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGSA. Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive

supported by helically wound spring steel wire.1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film.2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.



B. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlockingangle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips inaccordance with SMACNA (DCS).

2.05 CASINGSA. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures

indicated.B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch

centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage,0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sideswith sheet metal shields.

C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supportingangles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment forcleaning and inspection.

D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage, 0.0598 inch sheetsteel back facing and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch perforated sheet steel front facing with 3/32 inchdiameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu ftminimum glass fiber insulation media, on inverted channels of 16 gage, 0.0598 inch sheet steel.


A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.D. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with adhesive.E. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can withspring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulatedductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating andmaintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimpin direction of air flow.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct.

Do not use flexible duct to change direction.K. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum

length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.L. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.

3.02 CLEANINGA. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To

obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed byexcessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION


23 33 00 - 1AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Air turning devices/extractors.B. Backdraft dampers - metal.C. Backdraft dampers - fabric.D. Duct access doors.E. Duct test holes.F. Flexible duct connections.G. Volume control dampers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National

Fire Protection Association; 2015.B. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; 2014.C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS

A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individuallyadjustable blades, mounting straps.

2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METALA. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving

Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center

pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked togetherin rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - FABRICA. Fabric Backdraft Dampers: Factory-fabricated.

1. Blades: Neoprene coated fabric material.2. Birdscreen: 1/2 inch nominal mesh of galvanized steel or aluminum.3. Maximum Velocity: 1000 fpm (5 m/sec) face velocity.

2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORSA. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.



2.05 DUCT TEST HOLESA. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene

plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide

extended neck fittings to clear insulation.2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2.07 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERSA. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. Splitter Dampers:C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.2. Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum.

D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel framewith suitable hardware.1. Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum.

E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multipleblade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronzebearings.

F. Quadrants:1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.


A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and followSMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and whereindicated.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere asindicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provideminimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.E. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections

immediately adjacent to the equipment.F. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately

adjacent to the equipment.G. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths fromduct take-off.



H. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.END OF SECTION




23 37 00 - 1AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2012.B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American

Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets asto size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inletsshowing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carnes, a division of Carnes Company Inc.: www.carnes.com.B. Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.hartandcooley.com.C. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.D. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.E. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.

2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERSA. Type: Provide multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern.B. Connections: Round.C. Frame: Provide lay-in ceiling type. Provide surface mounting frame in hard ceiling. D. Fabrication: Steel with prime coat ready for final finish.E. Color: Field painted.F. Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade volume control damper; removable core and

sectorizing baffle with damper adjustable from diffuser face.2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLE

A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face.B. Frame: T-bar for lay-in ceiling and surface mount for hard ceiling.C. Fabrication: Steel with prime coat ready for final finish.D. Color: Field painted.



E. Color: As selected by Multatech Architects Engineers from manufacturer's standard range.2.04 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades setat 45 degrees, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: As scheduled.E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.2.05 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES

A. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch, 1/2 x 1/2 x 1 inch, and 1 x 1 x 1inch grid core.

B. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish.C. Color: As scheduledD. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.E. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.

2.06 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, single deflection.B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: As scheduled.E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.2.07 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grillewith two-way deflection.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory clear lacquer finish.D. Color: As scheduled.E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.2.08 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring orother device to set blades, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.C. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish.D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.



2.09 LOUVERS A. Type: 6 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy

channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh bird screen over exhaust and 3/4 inch square mesh birdscreen over intake.

B. Fabrication: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory primecoat finish.

C. Color: To be selected by Multatech Architects Engineers from manufacturer's standard range.D. Color: As shown on the drawings.E. Mounting: Furnish with interior flat flange for installation.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform

with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.END OF SECTION




26 05 19 - 1BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLEPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single conductor building wire.B. Armored cable.C. Metal-clad cable.D. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.E. Wiring connectors.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical

Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.C. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2012 (NECA/NACMA 102).D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under othersections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductorsizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminationssuitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Multatech Architects Engineers of any conflicts with or deviations from the contractdocuments. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors

and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, andavailable sizes, configurations, and stranding.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of usestipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actualrouting for underground circuits.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

B. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.C. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes

to luminaires.1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raisedfloors for branch circuits up to 20 A.1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun

from first outlet to panelboard.D. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes

to luminaires.1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raisedfloors for branch circuits up to 20 A.1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun

from first outlet to panelboard.2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where exposed to damage.b. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as

suitable for those locations.E. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.F. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway, armored cable, or metal clad

cable.G. Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway.H. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.I. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.J. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits or as indicated on drawings.K. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.L. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.M. Use 10 AWG minimum conductor for 20 ampere 120 or 277 volt 4 wire circuits (home runs).N. Conductor sizes are based on copper.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERSA. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.B. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.iewc.com.C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.



D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.F. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.G. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable tray

use.H. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where

specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return airplenums.

I. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.

Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.J. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.a. Exceptions:

1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.K. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl

color coding electrical tape.3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.D. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.



b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled

maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires withlabeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.2.05 ARMORED CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed foruse in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Conductor Stranding:1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.D. Insulation: Type THHN.E. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.G. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.

2.06 METAL-CLAD CABLEA. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed

for use in classified firestop systems to be used.B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.G. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.H. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of

installed location.I. Jacket: PVC; use in locations indicated.

2.07 WIRING CONNECTORSA. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the

conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C asapplicable.

B. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.C. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.E. Installation in Raceway:



1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and othercontaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same

manner.G. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

1. Armored Cable (Type AC):a. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings.b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or

insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.2. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or

insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.H. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or makesplices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unsplicedconductors.

M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.N. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally

colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns oftape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and

devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.Q. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support

cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating ofconductor.

S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices andtaps, 8 AWG and smaller.



T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10AWG and smaller.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test

is required for service and feeders. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optionalis not required.1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.

Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION


26 05 26 - 1GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth SurfacePotentials of a Ground System; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2012.

B. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power DistributionEquipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2007.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completegrounding and bonding system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

D. Grounding System Resistance:1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless

otherwise approved by Multatech Architects Engineers. Precipitation within the previous 48hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested accordingto IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, SystemNeutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using"point-to-point" methods.

E. Grounding Electrode System:1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form

grounding electrode system.a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical

damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end withbonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where

present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feetat an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to thebuilding.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipeelectrically continuous.



c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal ofmeter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal Building or Structure Frame:a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in

accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.4. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding

electrode system resistance.5. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common

connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70.Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding tothis ground bar.a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as

possible to service disconnect enclosure.F. Separately Derived System Grounding:

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor tonearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, makeconnection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metalbuilding frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system,where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connectionat same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipmentground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductorconnection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductorsand ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

5. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, providesupply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, andother normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electricalconductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance withNFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuitraceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipmentgrounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided toaccommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. Thisincludes, but is not limited to:a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water

pipe used as grounding electrode.b. Metal gas piping.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.



2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.a. Exceptions:

1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact withearth.

2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not inraceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors

and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,

concealed and other inaccessible connections.a. Exceptions:

1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground accesswells.

D. Ground Bars:1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.2. Size: As indicated.3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.

2.03 MANUFACTURERSA. Cooper Power Systems, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.B. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com.C. Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com.

2.04 ELECTRODESA. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Power Systems, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.2. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com.3. Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com.

B. Rod Electrodes: Copper-clad steel.1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.2. Length: 10 feet.

C. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG.2.05 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.B. Exothermic Connections:C. Wire: Stranded copper.D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.


A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.E. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.



3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitateinsertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, andcontact surfaces.

3. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

4. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended toolsand dies.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feederand branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

END OF SECTION


26 05 29 - 1HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electricalwork.

B. Conduit and equipment supports.C. Anchors and fasteners.D. Construction Requirements for concrete bases.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;

2013.D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association;

2004.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with NFPA 70.B. Comply with applicable building code.C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where

applicable.3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loadswhere applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment whereinstalled.a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.



B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to besupported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel

(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.F. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor andfastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. Or Equal

2.03 MATERIALSA. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size

and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire inconduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or

welded fasteners.3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance

with NECA 1.C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.D. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) tosupport equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted onhollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on itsown weight for support.

E. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.F. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system

components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.



G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION




26 05 34 - 1CONDUIT

CONDUITPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).B. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).F. Conduit fittings.G. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2013.E. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2004.F. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2003.G. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.I. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2013.J. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2015.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition



1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, includingadjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipmentinstalled under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve theintegrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete

between outlet, junction and splicing points.


26 05 34 - 2CONDUIT

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits,

fittings, metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing,nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, and conduit bodies.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs,

where permitted.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits

embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provideappropriate covering.

C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicatedfor the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with themost restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).D. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).E. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).F. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or

closets.G. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.H. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTSA. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only

where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verifiedby pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3/4" Trade SizeE. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.


26 05 34 - 3CONDUIT

F. Penetrating slab: Rigid steel conduit wrapped in pvc tape.G. Light fixture whips inside buildings: FMC. Use EMT for homeruns.H. Receptacle circuits in partition walls: FMC. Use EMT.I. At motors, transformers, or other components subject to vibration: Use 36" length of FMC or

LFMC (outdoors or wet environment).2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSIC80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeledas complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeledas complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Fittings:1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

C. Description: Interlocked steel construction.2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.

B. Fittings:1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 514B.2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.C. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.


26 05 34 - 4CONDUIT

2.07 ACCESSORIESA. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.B. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.C. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.D. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.D. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the

manufacturer.E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.F. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

required.3. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.4. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between

pull points.5. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces.6. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.

G. Conduit Support:1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.H. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanizedsteel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piececouplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid

into connectors.5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or

enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finishedfloor.


26 05 34 - 5CONDUIT

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protectconductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electricalcontinuity.

I. Penetrations:1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and

grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Install firestopping to preserve fire reistance rating of partitions and other elements.

J. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansionand expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connectedequipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

K. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to beinstalled by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.M. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protectionfrom entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation ofconductors.

3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTSA. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.END OF SECTION


26 05 34 - 6CONDUIT


26 05 37 - 1BOXES

BOXESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pullboxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National ElectricalContractors Association; 2010.

C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical MetallicTubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).

E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 2).

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 2014.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; CurrentEdition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.K. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BOXES

A. General Requirements:1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway

system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.


26 05 37 - 2BOXES

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and PullBoxes:1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise

indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.3. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.4. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where

required.5. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.6. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.7. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.8. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.9. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting ofluminaire where required.

10. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not usefield-connected gangable boxes.

11. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com. Or Equal.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mountingheights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and NFPA 70.

D. Box Supports:1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other

than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections inaccordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or othersystems.

E. Install boxes plumb and level.F. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. sothat front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surfacemore than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box orassociated raised cover is flush with finished surface.


26 05 37 - 3BOXES

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at theedge of the box.

G. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.H. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.I. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.J. Close unused box openings.K. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment

installed or designated for future use.L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.M. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.N. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.O. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.P. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and

backsplashes.Q. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.

1. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.R. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness.S. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal

box in other locations.3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.END OF SECTION


26 05 37 - 4BOXES


26 05 53 - 1IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Identification nameplates and labels.B. Wire and cable markers.C. Voltage markers.D. Underground warning tape.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight

of equipment.4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a

door.b. Transformers:

1) Identify kVA rating.2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.

2. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards forelectrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, metersocket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.a. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word

message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operatecontrols or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure tocomply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPErequirements" or approved equivalent.

3. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and otherguarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less withthe word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approvedequivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

C. Identification for Raceways:1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at

maximum intervals of 20 feet.



D. Identification for Boxes:1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.

E. Identification for Devices:1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26.2. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELSA. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use stainless steel to match Hospital nameplates.

2. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etchedtext.

B. Format for Equipment Identification:1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.2. Legend:

a. Equipment designation or other approved description.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height:

a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.b. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.

C. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe

operation and maintenance.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

D. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxeseach load connection.

2.04 CONDUIT MARKERSA. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or

vinyl snap-around type markers.B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or

self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.C. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

D. Legend:1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.2.05 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unlessotherwise required for proper detection.




A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.C. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to

interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.D. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches inches

below finished grade, or as indicated on drawings.END OF SECTION




26 09 23 - 1LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Occupancy sensors.B. Time switches.C. Outdoor photo controls.D. Ancillary low voltage switchesE. Manufacturer's site visits


1. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed doorswings.

2. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment orother potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections orby others.

3. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights,and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork,piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installedunder other sections or by others.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,

service condition requirements, and installed features.B. Field Quality Control Reports.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming andsetup.


1.05 WARRANTYA. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors.B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,

hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.C. Basis of Design: Wattstopper.D. Component types: Wattstopper model numbers per drawings and schedules.E. Substitution: Approved by Multatech, with all ancillary re-engineering provided by alternate

manufacturer's engineering department, similar in scope and detail as basis of design drawings.2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:



1. WattStopper; (Basis of Design: www.wattstopper.com.2. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. All Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor usecapable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as smalldesktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control ofload indicated.

2. Sensor Technology:3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor

type in dual technology units.4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant

presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during anadjustable turn-off delay time interval.

5. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.6. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting,

low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting withelectronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum loadrequirements.

C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integratedmanual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode,unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected duringthe delayed-off time interval.

D. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors:1. General Requirements:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrateddimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square lawdimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure presetmemory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed ascomplying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled.

E. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings,

provide line voltage units with self-contained relay.2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.

2.03 TIME SWITCHESA. Electromechanical Time Switches:

1. Description: Factory-assembled controller with motor-operated timing dial mechanism andadjustable trippers for setting on/off operations, listed and labeled as complying with UL917.

2. Program Capability:a. Astronomic Time Switches: With same schedule for each day of the week and

skip-a-day feature to omit selected days with automatic adjustment for seasonalchanges in sunrise and sunset times.



3. Schedule Capacity:a. Astronomic Time Switches: Capable of turning load on at sunset and off at either

sunrise or selected fixed time.4. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and

temporarily until next scheduled event.5. Input Supply Voltage: 120 V ac unless otherwise indicated.6. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the

following installation locations:a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are

properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or

wall plates.D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

lighting control devices.F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the

service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to

branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.D. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.E. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance

with Section 26 27 26.F. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely

flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain onwall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized roughopenings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

G. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53.H. Occupancy Sensor Locations:

1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicatewhich rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required forcomplete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendationsfor installed devices.

2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors aminimum of 6 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as permanufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.

I. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period permanufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps thatfail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.



J. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessibleceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.

K. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface withlighting control devices or associated power packs.

L. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does notturn off power pack.

M. Where indicated or required, provide cabinet or enclosure in accordance with Section 26 27 16for mounting of lighting control device system components.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Obtain services of manufacturer's representative to meet with the contractor on the site before

rough in of the lighting controls starts for educational purposes. Allow one day minimum on siteto go over complete installation details.

C. Obtain services of manufacturer's representative to commision lighting controls. Allow 2 dayson site to adjust, program, and instruct contractor to make wiring corrections or additions ifneeded.

D. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.E. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light

thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record testresults in written report to be included with submittals.

F. Test time switches to verify proper operation.G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.

3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to AAFES, HFPA, &

CRDAMC-FM.END OF SECTION


26 24 16 - 1PANELBOARDS

PANELBOARDSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Power distribution panelboards.B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.B. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2009.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.D. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013(ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entrylocations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actualinstalled circuiting arrangements.



A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.B. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same

manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtainedfrom a single supplier.

2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available faultcurrent at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

C. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each

feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where indicated, where oversized neutral

conductors are provided, or where panelboards are fed from K-rated transformers.3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for

each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.D. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: As indicated on the drawings.a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.


26 24 16 - 2PANELBOARDS

2. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. Furnish two of eachpanelboard key.

E. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices includingbussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICESA. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuitbreakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489; ratings, configurations, and featuresas indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity as indicated on drawings.3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

4. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1

(general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.C. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.D. Install panelboards plumb.E. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or

switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.G. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.H. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

3.02 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


26 27 26 - 1WIRING DEVICES

WIRING DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches.B. Receptacles.C. Wall plates.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.B. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2012.D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.


A. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. Or Equal2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptaclesinstalled outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

B. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for thepurpose specified and indicated.

2.04 WALL SWITCHESA. All Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver

alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL20; types as indicated on the drawings.

B. Switch Type: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way.2.05 RECEPTACLES

A. All Receptacles: Heavy Duty, Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6,and listed as complying with UL 498; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green

dot hospital grade mark on device face.B. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Hospital grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single,duplex, or double duplex as indicated on the drawings.


26 27 26 - 2WIRING DEVICES

C. GFCI Receptacles:1. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA

5-20R, rectangular decorator style.2. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant typecomplying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

2.06 WALL PLATESA. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiringdevices.

2. Size: Standard.B. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover

and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use withattachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.


A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, whereapplicable, NECA 130.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installationof wiring devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.c. Install telephone/data box 18 inches above finished floor.d. Install telephone box for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone 54

inches above finished floor.e. Install telephone box for forward-reach wall telphone to position top of telephone at 48

inches above finished floor.C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and

tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-inpressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

F. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.G. Install wall switches with OFF position down.H. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted

receptacles with grounding pole on left.I. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes orimproperly sized rough openings.

J. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed ordesignated for future use.

END OF SECTION


26 51 00 - 1INTERIOR LIGHTING

INTERIOR LIGHTINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires.B. Exit signs.C. Ballasts and drivers.D. Lamps.E. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent

Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.C. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.D. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2006.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2015.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingdetailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mountingrequirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, andceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposedfeatures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready forinstallation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS - LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish luminaires from manufactureres as listed in schedule on drawings.2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.2.03 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included in the drawings.



B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.

2.04 EXIT SIGNSA. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying

with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complyingwith UL 924.1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

2.05 BALLASTS AND DRIVERSA. Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronicballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.

2. Internal Disconnect Means: Provide switch or means to de-energize ballast for service.2.06 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:1. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide lamps produced by a single

manufacturer.B. Lamps - General Requirements:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not

specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state

lamp efficiency standards.C. Color temperature 4100 degree K.


A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.B. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general

workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).C. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.D. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.E. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated

on Drawings.F. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under section 26 05 37

using flexible conduit.G. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions with luminaire.H. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires.3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing

members or to building structure.4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.5. Secure lay-in luminaires to actual structure at all 4 corners independent of ceiling support

system.I. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center

of luminaire.



J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.K. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated.B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.

3.04 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

